HP Color LaserJet 3800 Printer series Technical Reference

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features

●

Effects tab features

●

Paper tab features

●

Job Storage tab features

●

Basics tab features

●

Color tab features

●

Configure tab features

●

96 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me

Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.

To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:

Click File.

Click Print.

Click Properties.

The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.

Properties driver tabs

In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.

The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:

●

General tab

●

Details tab

●

Color Management tab

●

Sharing tab

●

Finishing tab

●

Effects tab

●

Paper tab

●

Job Storage tab

●

Basics tab

●

Color tab

●

Configure tab

ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me 97

Only product-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the operating system. The following tabs are described:

●

Finishing

●

Effects

●

Paper

●

Job Storage

●

Configure

●

Basics

●

Color

●

Configure

The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage Enable setting is selected on the tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Configure tab.

98 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Help system

The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.

What's this? Help

Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:

●

Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.

●

Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.

●

Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.

Context-sensitive Help

When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.

Incompatible Options messages

Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.

NOTE

Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the product documentation for the product capabilities.`

ENWW

Figure 3-1

A typical constraint message with an OK button

Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK and Cancel buttons, the interpretation of the buttons is as follows:

●

Click OK to accept the change that was just made. The driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.

● Click Cancel to reject the change that was just made. The control returns to its previous value.

Help system 99

Bubble Help

Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in it, representing the international symbol for information. The following figure shows a Bubble Help icon on a driver tab.

Figure 3-2

A typical page with a Bubble Help icon

The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware of when using that particular feature.

100 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Finishing tab features

To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Finishing tab.

Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page, to control the printed output on the page, and to print booklets. The following figure shows the Finishing tab.

ENWW

Figure 3-3

The default Finishing tab

The Finishing tab contains the following controls:

●

●

Document Options

●

The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver

●

Print Quality

Finishing tab features 101

Print Task Quick Sets

The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the tab affects the Print Task Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Properties driver tabs that have the Print

Task Quick Sets settings:

●

Finishing

●

Effects

●

Paper

●

Job Storage

●

Basics

●

Color

Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on).

By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Properties driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the drop-down menu and click

Delete.

NOTE

Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator

Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.

You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save more, a message box appears that contains the following message: There are too many Print Task

Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones.

The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:

●

Default Print Settings

●

User Guide Print Settings

Default Print Settings

When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.

Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings.

102 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer

Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets for

Default values

Preconfigurable

Print on Both Sides

Flip Pages Up

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Watermark message angle (angle)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Available, not selected

Unavailable, not selected

Yes

Booklet Printing

Pages per Sheet

Print Page Borders

Page Order

Print Quality

Current Setting

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Unavailable, Off

Unavailable

Finishing tab, Print Quality group box

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Default

This is the “Default” setting

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Automatic Raster Compression

(HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver only)

Rendering Mode

(HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver only)

Send Truetype as

Bitmaps

Output Settings

Print Document On

Size to print on

Scale to Fit

Watermarks

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Automatic

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Available, not selected

Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box

(Click Details on Finishing tab.)

Scale Patterns

(WYSIWIG) selected

Yes

Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Yes

Effects tab, Fit to Page group box

Off; print on the size that is specified on the Paper tab

Actual size specified on the Paper tab

Yes

Effects tab, Fit to Page group box

Effects tab, Watermarks dialog box

First Page Only

(watermark)

Effects tab, Watermark dialog box

Current Watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Message Angle

(watermark)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Unavailable, selected Yes

(none) Yes

Unavailable Yes

(none)

Diagonal

Yes

Unavailable unless

Angle option is selected, 52 degrees

Yes

Finishing tab features 103

Table 3-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued)

Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets for

Default values

Preconfigurable

Name (watermark font)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Color (watermark font)

Shading (watermark font )

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Size (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Arial

Gray

Very Light

Yes

Style (watermark font)

Use Different Paper/

Covers

Size is:

Source is:

Type is:

Unlabeled group box

Job Storage Mode

Job Storage tab Status message about the destination of the job

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off

Proof and Hold

Private Job

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,

Font Attributes group box

Paper tab, Paper Options group box

Regular

Off (All of the pages use the same media.)

Letter Yes

Automatically Select

Unspecified

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected

Yes

Quick Copy

Stored Job

Orientation

Landscape

Rotate by 180 degrees

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected

Require PIN to print option

PIN to Print

Windows User Name

Job Name

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, not selected

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, blank

Job Storage tab, User Name group box

Job Storage tab, Job Name group box

Unavailable, selected No

Unavailable,

Automatic selected

Unavailable No Display Job ID when printing

Copy

Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group box

Basics tab, Copies group box 1 Yes

Basics tab, Orientation group box

Portrait

Available, not selected

Yes

104 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued)

Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets for

Default values

Preconfigurable

Automatic (color options)

Manual (color options)

Current Setting

(color)

Edge Control

Neutral Grays (text)

Color tab, Color Options group box

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.), General group box

Selected

Available, not selected

This is the

“Automatic” Setting

Normal

Black Only

Yes

Halftone (text)

Neutral Grays

(graphics)

Halftone (graphics)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Detail

Black Only

Yes

Neutral Grays

(photographs)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Detail

4-Color

Yes

Halftone

(photographs)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Detail Yes

Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see

HP Driver Preconfiguration

, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw .

Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.

User Guide Print Settings

The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.

When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings:

●

Print on Both Sides is set to ON

● Flip Pages Up is set to ON

●

Booklet Printing is set to OFF and is unavailable

● Pages per Sheet is set to 2

●

Page Order is set to Right then Down

Document Options

The Document Options group box contains the following controls:

●

Print on Both Sides

●

Flip Pages Up

Finishing tab features 105

●

●

●

●

Print on Both Sides

The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist:

●

Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any of the following media types except for the following types:

●

Labels

●

Transparency

●

Envelope

●

Extra Heavy

●

Cardstock

●

Tough Paper

●

Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes:

●

Statement

●

Envelope #10

●

Envelope DL

●

Envelope C5

●

Envelope B5

●

Envelope Monarch

●

Double Japan Postscard Rotated

Selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available when

Paper Size is set to the following media sizes:

●

Letter

●

Legal

●

Automatically printing on both sides

The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both

Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models:

●

HP Color LaserJet 3800dn

●

HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn

106 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.

All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types:

●

Prepunched

●

Preprinted

●

Letterhead

When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.

To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.

Manually printing on both sides

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 and HP Color LaserJet 3800n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.

Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. (The PS Emulation Driver does not support this feature.) If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the product automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4,

Legal, and 8.5 x 13, only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.

To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the

Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. See

Paper

Handling Options in the

Configure tab features section of this chapter.

If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, you must click to clear the Duplexing Unit check box on the Configure tab.

Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:

●

Plain

●

Preprinted

●

Letterhead

● Prepunched

●

Bond

●

Recycled

Finishing tab features 107

●

Colored

● Rough

Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.

Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.

To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.

Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.

When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.

Figure 3-4

Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box

When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.

Flip Pages Up

Use the Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation that is selected on the Basics tab.

108 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-2

Page orientation

Orientation (Basics tab)

Portrait

Landscape

Flip Pages Up selected

Short-edge binding

Long-edge binding

Flip Pages Up not selected

Long-edge binding

Short-edge binding

When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.

Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.

Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.

Booklet Printing

The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet Printing dropdown menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the

Paper tab:

●

[paper size] (Left Binding)

●

[paper size] (Right Binding)

When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually

to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. For more information, see Pages per

Sheet

Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes (such as envelopes) are selected as the media size, and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver.

The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:

●

Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.

● % of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.

●

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.

● Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.

If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet

Printing to tell you why it is disabled.

Book and Booklet Printing

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports both book and booklet printing.

A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,

Last Page, or Back Cover settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the Use Different

Finishing tab features 109

Paper/Covers check box) to select different printing options for the book. For more information, see

Paper tab features in this chapter.

A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.

To print a booklet

Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.

In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.

Click the Finishing tab.

Select the Print on Both Sides check box.

In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter

[Left binding]).

Click OK in the print driver.

Click OK in the print dialog box to print.

Figure 3-5

Printing a booklet

Pages per Sheet

110 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:

●

1 page per sheet (default)

●

2 pages per sheet

●

4 pages per sheet

●

6 pages per sheet

●

9 pages per sheet

●

16 pages per sheet

When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.

Print Page Borders

Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and

Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.

Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.

Page Order

The Page Order drop-down menu contains the following selections:

●

Right, then Down

●

Down, then Right

●

Left, then Down

●

Down, then Left

The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 3-6

Page-order preview images

●

2 pages per sheet

●

4 pages per sheet

●

6 pages per sheet

●

9 pages per sheet

●

16 pages per sheet

Finishing tab features 111

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

●

Finishing

●

Effects

●

Paper

●

Basics

●

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes.

Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.

Print Quality

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 print-driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output settings and font settings.

The default setting for Print Quality is Default. To change the default print-quality settings, click

Details…. The Print Quality Details dialog box opens. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver that you are using.

Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-7

Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

The following options are available:

●

Current Setting

112 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

●

Graphic Settings

●

Font Settings

●

Output Settings

Current Setting

The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"

setting to This is a "Custom" setting.

Graphic Settings

The Graphics Settings group box contains the Raster Compression drop-down menu.

Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method. The Raster

Compression drop-down menu provides the following settings:

●

Automatic. The print driver determines the best compression method to use. This is the default setting.

●

Best Quality. This setting forces the print driver to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)

●

Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this setting requires the print driver to always use a lossy compression method (some data is lost).

Font Settings

In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.

Output Settings

The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings:

●

Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.

●

The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.

Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following figure.

Finishing tab features 113

Figure 3-8

Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver

The following options are available:

●

●

●

●

Current Setting

The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"

setting to This is a "Custom" setting.

Graphic Settings

The Graphic Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: options are available:

● Automatic. This is the default setting.

●

Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of

HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higherquality output.

● Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.

●

Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the printer as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType as Bitmaps option has no effect.

Font Settings

114 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.

Output Settings

The Output Settings group box contains controls for pattern scaling, and to print all text as black.

The following are default values for the Output Settings:

●

ENWW Finishing tab features 115

Effects tab features

To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Effects tab.

Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab.

Figure 3-9

Effects tab

The Effects tab contains the following controls:

●

●

Fit To Page

●

●

Watermarks

116 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see

Fit To Page

The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls:

●

Print Document On

●

Scale to Fit

●

% of Normal Size

Print Document On

Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.

The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:

●

% of Normal Size is not 100.

●

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.

When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media size.

Scale to Fit

The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On option selected and the target size specified as Letter.

ENWW

Figure 3-10

Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)

Effects tab features 117

When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.

% of Normal Size

The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.

The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).

Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.

The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.

You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into the entry box.

The following settings disable % of Normal Size:

●

Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.

●

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

●

Finishing

●

Effects

●

Paper

●

Basics

●

Color

For more information about the document preview image, see

Watermarks

Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark.

The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:

●

Current Watermarks

118 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

●

First Page Only

●

Edit…

Current Watermarks

The following watermarks are preset in the driver:

●

(none)

●

Confidential

●

Draft

●

SAMPLE

The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting.

Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.

First Page Only

When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The

First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".

Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First

Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).

Edit…

Click Edit…, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following figure shows the

Watermark Details dialog box.

Effects tab features 119

Figure 3-11

Watermark Details dialog box

The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.

The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:

NOTE

This section also contains information about default watermark settings.

●

Current Watermarks

●

Watermark Message

●

Message Angle

●

Default watermark settings

●

Font Attributes

●

Current Watermarks

The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.

To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it.

To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.

To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.

120 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.

When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.

To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the

Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.

Watermark Message

The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).

Message Angle

Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:

● Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.

●

Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-;eft and mid-right edges of the page.

● Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric spin box to select the angle.

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box. The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark

Details dialog box.

Font Attributes

Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font.

The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:

●

Name

The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent.

●

Color

The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:

●

Gray

●

Red

Effects tab features 121

●

Yellow

●

Green

●

Cyan

●

Blue

●

Magenta

●

Shading

The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:

●

Lightest

●

Very Light (default)

●

Light

●

Medium Light

●

Medium

●

Medium Dark

●

Dark

●

Very Dark

●

Darkest

These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select

Darkest to produce a black watermark.

●

Size

Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.

●

Style

The following settings are available:

●

Regular

●

Bold

●

Italic

●

Bold Italic

The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.

Default watermark settings

The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.

122 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Table 3-3

Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks

Setting

Name

Color

Shading

Size

Style

New watermark

Arial

Gray

Very Light

Regular

Preset watermark

Varies by language

Gray

Very Light

Varies by language

Regular

Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking

Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.

ENWW Effects tab features 123

Paper tab features

To gain access to the Paper tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Paper tab.

Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper tab.

Figure 3-12

Paper tab

The Paper tab contains the following controls:

●

●

Paper Options

●

124 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

●

Product image

Print Task Quick Sets

Paper Options

The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections available by default.

ENWW

Figure 3-13

Paper Options group box (default)

The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:

●

Size is

●

Source is

●

Type is

●

For information about media sizes, see Media attributes .

●

Custom

Size is

The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.

NOTE

When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.

You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size

Paper tab features 125

media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must also use Letter-size media.

Because print-driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally best to use the print driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.

NOTE

Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document.

When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray.

When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the

Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see

Custom width and height control limits

Custom

The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.

NOTE

The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected

and any setting other than First Page is also selected.

Figure 3-14

Custom Paper Size dialog box

When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab:

● If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains the name of that custom size.

●

If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default name Untitled (plus a number sign [#] and a numerical value) for a custom media size.

126 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4 inches x 11 inches).

The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not against the standard media-size names.

The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the

Save, Delete, or Rename

section.

Name

The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently.

Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to type a new name for a custom media size.

The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following conditions:

●

If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name of the last selected custom media size.

● If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default name of "Untitled."

●

If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.

If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click Save, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size.

Paper tab features 127

Save, Delete, or Rename

The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:

Save, Delete, and Rename.

●

Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names.

If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the

Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button.

●

Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the dropdown menu or clicking Save. Clicking Delete causes the saved custom media size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.

●

Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu.

The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.

Table 3-4

Name drop-down menu text strings

State Button label Action Next state

Drop-down menu contents

Untitled Save

<user-typed text>

<name of saved item> Delete

<user-typed text>

Save

Rename

Click Save.

Type something into the Name drop-down menu.

Change the width or height values.

Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.

Click Save.

Type something into the Name drop-down menu.

Change the width or height values.

Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.

Click Delete.

Type something into the Name drop-down menu.

Change the width or height values.

Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.

Click Rename (when the name is unique).

Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate).

Type something into the Name drop-down menu.

128 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-4

Name drop-down menu text strings (continued)

State Drop-down menu contents

Button label Action

Change the width or height values.

Select a saved item from the drop-down menu.

Next state

Custom size (width and height controls)

The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the up and down arrows. The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.

Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See

If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.

The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values change.

Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic measurement units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric).

Custom width and height control limits

The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device.

Table 3-5

PCL 6 custom media sizes

Tray

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

Tray 3 (500-sheet)

Duplexing unit

Dimensions

Width

Height

Width

Height

Width

Height

Width

Height

Minimum

76.2 mm (3.0 inches)

127.0 mm (5.0 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

Maximum

215 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

Paper tab features 129

Dynamic measurement units

Use the dynamic measurement units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard

(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch measurement-unit types.

Close

When you click the Close button, the Custom Paper Size dialog box closes according to the logic in the following table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while the dialog box is open remains in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.

Table 3-6

Close dialog-box text strings

If the drop-down menu contains

Untitled

<user-typed text>

<user-typed text>

And the button says

Save

Delete

Rename

Then this happens when you click the

Close button

The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.

The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the

Custom button.

The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.

The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the

Custom button.

The dialog box closes, and the current media size is set to the size that last appeared in the drop-down menu.

The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.

The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the

Custom button.

Source is

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here.

The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the product:

●

Automatically select

●

Manual Feed in Tray 1

●

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)

130 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

●

Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)

● Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)

The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.

For more information about media sources, see the

Media attributes section of this STR.

Type is

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports.

When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually

Plain.

The following standard types appear in the list:

●

Unspecified

●

Plain

●

Preprinted

●

Letterhead

●

Transparency

●

Prepunched

●

Labels

●

Bond

●

Recycled

●

Color

●

Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (45–60.3 lb)

●

Rough

●

Heavy 105-120 g/m2 (28.8–32.9 lb)

●

Envelope

●

Light 60-75 g/m2 (16.4–20.5 lb)

●

Intermediate 90-104 g/m2 (24.7–28.5 lb)

●

Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m2 (32.9–44.7 lb)

●

Glossy 106-120 g/m2 (29.1–32.9 lb)

●

Tough Paper (Glossy Film)

The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting.

When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray.

Paper tab features 131

For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR.

Use Different Paper/Covers

You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with associated options:

●

Front Cover

●

First Page

●

Other Pages

●

Last Page

●

Back Cover

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is: driver setting becomes unavailable for all of the other Use Different Paper/Covers options. Therefore, the First Page settings are described first in the following sections.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.

Front Cover

Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the document.

The Front Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-15

Front Cover options

132 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

The following are the Front Cover options:

● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

●

Source is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is:drop-down menu settings, see the

Type is

section of this chapter.

First Page

Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.

ENWW

Figure 3-16

First Page options

The following are the First Page options:

●

Size is: drop-down menu

●

Source is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the

Paper tab features 133

section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the

Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source is

Other Pages

Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First

Page) for the other pages of the document.

The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-17

Other Pages options

The following are the Other Pages options:

●

Source is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the

Last Page

Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document.

The Last Page setting and options are shown in the following figure.

134 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Figure 3-18

Last Page options

The following are the Last Page options:

●

Source is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the

Back Cover

Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document.

The Back Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 3-19

Back Cover setting

Paper tab features 135

The following are the Back Cover options:

● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

●

Source is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.

NOTE

The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

Source is

section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

●

Finishing

●

Effects

●

Paper

●

Basics

●

Color

For more information about the document preview image, see

Product image

The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration of the product and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties.

On the Paper tab, the product image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The current

136 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a product-image hot spot, is highlighted on the printer image. The following points are worth noting:

●

The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the product image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding part in the printer image.

●

Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in the

Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image.

●

On the Paper tab, only source trays have product-image hot spots and can be highlighted.

ENWW Paper tab features 137

Job Storage tab features

To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Job Storage tab.

NOTE

The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 128 MB of total memory is installed and configured.

Use the job-storage features to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.

The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled. To support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript

(.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features. A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB is required to use the job-storage features.

After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the

Configure tab features

section in this chapter.

To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Configure tab.

Under Other Options, click More….

If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down menu.

If you select at least 128 MB of total installed memory, this also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.

If a hard disk has been installed, select the Printer Hard Disk check box in the Storage group box. This also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.

10.

Click OK to make the hard-disk and job-storage features available.

138 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the hard disk enabled. To disable the job-storage feature, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Configure tab.

Click More….

Click to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box.

NOTE

When the job-storage features are disabled (that is, when the Job Storage

Enabled check box is not selected and the settings are saved), the Job Storage tab is not visible.

If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:

●

Proof and Hold

●

Private Job

Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:

●

Quick Copy

●

Stored Job

The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.

Job Storage tab features 139

Figure 3-20

Job Storage tab

The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:

NOTE

This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing.

●

Using job-storage features when printing

●

Status dialog box

●

Job Storage Mode

●

Job Notification Options

●

User Name

●

Job Name

●

Print Task Quick Sets

to print the job. For more information, see Private Job

140 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Status dialog box

The unlabeled dialog box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job

Storage tab.

Job Storage Mode

Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel.

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:

●

●

●

●

●

These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections.

Off

When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.

Proof and Hold

To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 128 MB.

When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the product control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.

After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

NOTE

The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.

Private Job

To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the product must have a minimum total memory of 128 MB.

Job Storage tab features 141

When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.

Quick Copy

To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.

NOTE

Stored Job

To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.

The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or is overwritten by a document that has the same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.

A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job.

Select the Require PIN to Print check box to set the private mode. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN up to 4 digits long at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.)

After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel.

The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored job private.

142 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.

The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated if you select either of the following options:

● Select Private Job. If selected, you must type the PIN number at the product control panel in order

●

Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to

Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For more information, see

Stored Job

Job Notification Options

Clicking a job-storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID

when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.

The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location.

User Name

Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings:

● Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.

The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options.

●

Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the

Custom option, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters.

Job Name

Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the Job Name settings:

●

<Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name.

● Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the

Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which

<Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.

Job Storage tab features 143

The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.

When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the

Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.

If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the product software can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or when one is created automatically, the product software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want the product software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.

Using job-storage features when printing

To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:

Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.

NOTE

Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features.

Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.

Click the Job Storage tab.

Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.

Click OK.

Releasing a job-storage print job

After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press .

If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.

144 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 8.

Press and to select the number of copies to print.

Press to print the job.

Deleting a job-storage print job

Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press .

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press .

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

Press to delete the job.

The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.

Job Storage tab features 145

Basics tab features

To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Basics tab.

The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.

Figure 3-21

Basics tab

The Basics tab contains the following controls:

●

●

Copies

●

Orientation

●

146 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

●

About…

Print Task Quick Sets

Copies

Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.

The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.

When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.

Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.

Orientation

Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.

NOTE

Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.

The Orientation group box contains three options:

● Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.

●

Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.

● Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.

You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.

Basics tab features 147

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

●

Finishing

●

Effects

●

Paper

●

Basics

●

Color

For more information about the document preview image, see

About…

When you click About on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver Properties tabs, the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close it, perform any of the following actions:

●

Click OK.

●

Press Esc .

●

Press Alt + F4 .

●

Press Enter .

The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box. The information that it contains varies according to driver, date, and version.

Figure 3-22

About This Driver dialog box

148 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information:

● Printer name

●

Driver name

●

Print driver version number

●

Driver Extensions (if any)

●

Configuration Status

The printer name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box.

The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any.

The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.

ENWW Basics tab features 149

Color tab features

To gain access to the Color tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Color tab.

Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-23

Color tab

The Color tab contains the following controls:

●

●

Color Options

●

Color Themes

150 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

●

Print Task Quick Sets

CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

Color Options

Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:

●

Automatic option (default)

●

Manual option

●

Settings button (Click this to open the Color Settings dialog box.)

●

Print in Grayscale check box

Automatic

Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The

Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color-printing needs.

Manual

To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color

Settings dialog box appears.

To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Automatic" settings.

Color tab features 151

Figure 3-24

Color Settings dialog box

The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls for each of the following components:

●

General

●

Edge Control

●

Text

●

Neutral Grays

●

Halftone

●

Graphics

●

Neutral Grays

●

Halftone

●

Photographs

●

Neutral Grays

●

Halftone

General

Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.

152 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:

● Adaptive Halftoning, which increases edge sharpness

●

Trapping, which reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects

● Color Resolution Enhancement Technology (C-REt), which increases the apparent resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges

The Edge Control option offers four settings:

● Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to

On, and C-REt is set to On.

●

Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is set to On.

●

Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On.

●

Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.

Neutral Grays

The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the product firmware. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs. The following options are available:

●

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for the Text and Graphics components.

●

4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.

Halftone

The Halftone setting controls the selection of a printer-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the product mixes the four primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The following Halftone settings are available:

●

Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option for sharp edges and detail.

●

Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area fills.

Print in Grayscale

Select Print in Grayscale to print a document in black and white. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hard-copy output quickly or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.

Color tab features 153

Color Themes

This group box contains controls for color settings:

●

RGB Color

●

RGB Color

The RGB Color drop-down menu contains the following settings:

●

Default (sRGB)

●

Image Optimization (sRGB)

●

Adobe RGB (1998)

●

None

●

Custom Profile

Default (sRGB)

Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).

Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.

Image Optimization (sRGB)

Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the product to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vectorbased graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.

Adobe RGB (1998)

Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RGB, and documents that are produced with

Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB, turn off the color management in the software program and allow the product software to manage the color space.

None

Select None to instruct the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating system.

NOTE

To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.

154 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Custom Profile

Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.

The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.

You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware

CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

The CMYK Color drop-down menu contains the following settings:

Default CMYK+

Select Default CMYK+ to enable a high-quality default CMYK print path. This option can be selected for most digital commercial print jobs and should produce optimal prints.

SWOP

SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) is a common ink standard in the United States of

America and other countries/regions.

Euroscale

Euroscale, also known as Euro Standard, is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/ regions.

DIC

DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical) is a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions.

Custom Profile

You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware

Color tab features 155

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:

●

Finishing

●

Effects

●

Paper

●

Basics

●

Color

For more information about the document preview image, see

Allow Scaling from Large Paper

156 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Configure tab features

To gain access to the Configure tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Configure tab.

Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the product hardware configuration. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking Update Now. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.

The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking

Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure tab looks like the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 3-25

Configure tab

The Configure tab contains the following controls:

Configure tab features 157

●

Printer Model

●

Paper Handling Options

●

Other Options

●

Automatic configuration

●

Printer image

Printer Model

In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the printer model that is being used. Selection of any model in the drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab.

The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the device configuration settings on the tab.

The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the following table. The models are as follows:

●

3800: HP Color LaserJet 3800

●

3800n: HP Color LaserJet 3800n

●

3800dn: HP Color LaserJet 3800dn

●

3800dtn: HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn

Table 3-7

Printer-model configuration settings

Driver location

Configuration tab

Setting 3800

Duplexing Unit

Available, not selected

Allow Manual Duplexing

Selected

Mopier Enabled

Unavailable

Optional Paper Sources

(None)

More Configuration

Options dialog box

Printer Hard Disk

Job Storage Enabled

Available, not selected

Unavailable

Font Card(s)

Selected

Allow Scaling from Large

Paper

Available, not selected

Unavailable

Alternative Letterhead

Mode

Ignore Application

Collation

Total Memory

Unavailable

64 MB

3800n

Available, not selected

Selected

Unavailable

(None)

Available, not selected

Selected

Available, not selected

Unavailable

Selected

128 MB

3800dn

Selected

(None)

Available, not selected

Selected

1 x HP 500-

Sheet Input

Tray

Available, not selected

Selected

Available, not selected

Selected

Available, not selected

Selected

256 MB

3800dtn

Selected

256 MB

158 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-7

Printer-model configuration settings (continued)

Driver location Setting 3800

Driver work space (DWS) 6.0 MB

Include Types in

Applications Source List

Selected

3800n

38.0 MB

Selected

3800dn

102.0 MB

Selected

3800dtn

102.0 MB

Selected

If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the Configure tab. However, the printer-model name that appears in the Printer Model text box is set to

Autoconfigured.

Paper Handling Options

The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:

●

Duplexing unit

●

Allow Manual Duplexing

●

Mopier Enabled

●

Optional Paper Sources

Duplexing unit

The HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which you can use to print on both sides of supported media.

Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the following media types:

●

Transparency

● Labels

●

Extra Heavy

● Cardstock

●

Tough Paper

● Envelope

NOTE

These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page.

Allow Manual Duplexing

Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.

Configure tab features 159

Mopier Enabled

The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the

Configure tab is on.

Mopier mode and collation

Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the product. Collating is controlled by using either the print driver or the document software program. Click to clear the Mopier Enabled selection on the Configure tab to disable the feature.

Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click More… on the

Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control collation.

To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the Ignore

Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.

The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result," shows how a three-page print job would appear.

Table 3-8

Driver Mopier mode and collation settings

Mopier Enabled

Not selected

Selected

Application collation

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Ignore Application

Collation

Not available

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Expected result

3 copies uncollated

3 copies collated

3 copies uncollated

3 copies collated by printer

Optional Paper Sources

The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The list of available source trays varies depending on the printer, its input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab.

160 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

For the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper

Sources drop-down menu:

●

(None). This is the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

●

HP 500-Sheet Input Tray

Other Options

The Other Options group box contains a single More… command button. Click More… to open the

More Configuration Options dialog box.

ENWW

Figure 3-26

More Configuration Options dialog box

The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls:

●

Storage

●

Fonts

●

●

Alternative Letterhead Mode

●

Ignore Application Collation

●

Printer Memory

●

Include Types in Application Source List

Storage

The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes. If the product is equipped with a hard-disk drive, the Printer Hard Disk check box should be selected and all job-storage options are available. If your HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is not equipped with a hard-disk drive but has a minimum of 128 MB of memory, limited job-storage options are available. When the job-

Configure tab features 161

storage feature is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the product control panel.

Fonts

The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button.

Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored data about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is enabled. Click Configure to open the Configure Font Cards dialog box. If the Font Card(s) check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box.

Figure 3-27

Configure Font Cards dialog box

Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks:

●

Add up to four font cards by clicking the Add button.

● Specify a unique font-card name.

●

Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards.

● Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts) shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s).

●

Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).

Complete the following steps to configure a font card:

Make sure that the font card is installed correctly.

Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears.

Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears.

Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card.

Click OK.

162 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Specify a font-card name in the Add Font Card dialog box, if necessary.

Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list.

Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available on the system.

NOTE

When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional

PCL 5 Driver: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is specifically designed to work with that card.

Allow Scaling from Large Paper

Select Allow Scaling from Large Paper to allow additional larger-than-supported paper sizes to appear in the Paper tab Size Is: drop-down list. By default, the Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is

not selected.

The Allow Scaling from Large Paper selection can be helpful, for example, when printing a document with a large media size of 11 x 17 or A3. You can use the Print Document On: setting on the Effects tab to print the document on a media size that product supports.

Alternative Letterhead Mode

When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or facedown, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.

When this option is selected, you must select one of the following options in the Type is setting:

●

Letterhead

●

Preprinted

Ignore Application Collation

This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program. When

Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using.

Printer Memory

The Total Memory value shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer.

The Total memory value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. The default values for total printer memory are specified on the Configuration tab.

The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available to the printer. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.

The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the Total Memory and (DWS) values in Windows 98 and Windows Me environments that support bidirectional communication. To

Configure tab features 163

manually set the Total Memory and (DWS) values, print a configuration page and find the Total Memory and DWS values in the Memory section of the page. Then, click More… on the Configuration tab, and either use the up and down arrows to select the appropriate values or type the Total Memory and DWS values in the Total Memory and (DWS) fields of the More Configuration Options dialog box.

Include Types in Application Source List

When the Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected, all media types (such as heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu and then clicking Properties.

Automatic configuration

If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer since installation, click

Update Now to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information about the

print driver automatic configuration feature, see the Driver Configuration for Windows

section of this

STR.

If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the

Configure tab.

If you have more than one driver installed on your product (for example, the default HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for your product model.

Printer image

The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the product according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab.

NOTE

The product image shown on the Configure tab might differ from the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, depending on the accessories that are installed.

164 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features

When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional

PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the HP Traditional Postscript

3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.

NOTE

Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely match the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet

Printer installation method to install the PS Emulation Driver.

This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver

Properties interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for

Windows 98 and Windows Me.

Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me

In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.

●

General

●

Details

●

Color Management

●

Sharing

●

Paper

●

Graphics

●

Fonts

●

Device Options

●

PostScript

PS 3 emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800

A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently install soft fonts in the printer, postscript fonts are available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS

ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 165

emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from

Adobe.

Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe

PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe

Web site at the following Web site: www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html

See the Font support

section of this STR for a list of the additional fonts.

Help system

The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.

NOTE

Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the PS Emulation

Driver.

What's this Help

Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:

●

Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.

● Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.

●

Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.

Context-sensitive Help

When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.

Paper tab features

To gain access to the Paper tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Paper tab.

The Paper tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the Paper tab.

166 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 3-28

Paper tab

The Paper tab contains the following controls:

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Paper size

The Paper size selection area lists the paper or envelope sizes that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports. Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of supported media sizes (forms), and then click the icon to specify the media that you want.

A red circle with a line through any of the paper icons means that paper size is available, but you must change a driver setting before you can print on that media size. The setting might be on the Paper tab, such as the Paper source setting, or it might be a setting on the product control panel.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 167

Clicking Custom page 1, Custom page 2, or Custom page 3 makes the Custom button available at the bottom of the Paper tab. Clicking Custom opens the Custom-defined size dialog box that you can use to define a custom paper size.

The following figure shows the Custom-defined size dialog box.

Figure 3-29

Custom-designed size dialog box

The following controls appear on the Custom-defined size dialog box:

●

Paper name text box. Use this option to type a name for this custom media size. You can define up to three custom sizes at one time.

● Width spin box. Use this control to specify the width for this custom media size.

●

Length spin box. Use this control to specify the length for this custom media size.

● Units group box. Click Inches or Millimeters to specify the measurement unit for this custom media size.

●

Transverse check box. Clicking this check box rotates the document 90° when printing on a rollfed device. Depending on the size of the printed page, you might save media` if you rotate the page when printing.

● Restore defaults button. Click this button to restore the settings in the Custom-defined size dialog box to their original values.

Layout

Use the settings in this group box to specify how many pages of the document print on a single sheet.

For example, clicking 1 up prints one page of the document on each sheet. Clicking 2 up prints two pages on each sheet of paper, dividing the sheet in half. The Layout group box values are ignored if you print an EPS file.

The following options are available in the Layout group box:

●

1 up

●

2 up

●

4 up

168 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Orientation

The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page. The following options are available:

●

Portrait option button. Use this button to print your document in portrait mode. When you click this button, the page icon shows an example of the portrait orientation.

●

Landscape option button. Use this button to print your document in landscape mode. When you click this button, the page icon shows an example of the landscape orientation.

●

Rotate check box. The Rotate check box becomes available when you click the Landscape option.

Select the Rotate check box to rotate the image on the page.

To see the current dimensions of the page, such as the paper size and the unprintable margins, point to the page icon, and then press and hold down the mouse button. The Orientation group box is replaced by the Page dimensions in inches group box as seen in the following figure. Releasing the mouse button restores the Orientation group box.

ENWW

Figure 3-30

Page dimensions in inches

Paper source

This setting specifies where the media that you want to use is located in the printer. The default setting is Auto Select Tray, which causes the printer to use the tray that supports the paper size that you have chosen.

The following options are available:

●

Auto Select Tray

●

Printer Auto Select

●

Manual Feed in Tray 1

●

Tray 1 through Tray 3, if installed on the product. If any of these trays are not installed, a red circle with a slash through it appears next to the tray name.

● Each of the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports, such as Plain,

Preprinted, and Letterhead. For a full list of supported paper types see

Driver-supported media types .

Copies

Use this box to specify the number of copies to print. You can print from 1 to 999 copies. This option is ignored when printing an .EPS file. Some software programs override this setting.

Unprintable Area…

Click Unprintable Area … to open the Unprintable Area dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 169

Figure 3-31

Unprintable Area dialog box

The area of the page that cannot be printed appears in the Unprintable Area dialog box. Changing these settings to exceed the built-in page margins can cause the text in your document to be cut off when printed.

More Options…

Click More Options … to open the More Paper Options dialog box, shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-32

More Paper Options dialog box

The single control on this dialog box is the Printing on both sides (duplex printing) group box.

Use the settings in this group box to specify how you want to turn the page if you print on both sides.

When you print on two sides of the page, the document can be read differently depending on the way it is printed. For example, you could have the pages of the document turn like a book or like a calendar.

When you click Flip On Long Edge or Flip On Short Edge, the page icon changes to illustrate how the printed document will look.

About …

Click About… to open a dialog box that contains copyright and version information about the print driver.

The following figure shows the About dialog box.

170 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Figure 3-33

About dialog box

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Paper tab to their original values.

Graphics tab features

To gain access to the Graphics tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Graphics tab.

The Graphics tab specifies the resolution, color controls, and halftoning settings for the product. The following figure shows the Graphics tab.

ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 171

Figure 3-34

Graphics tab

The Graphics tab contains the following controls:

●

●

●

●

●

●

Resolution

Use the Resolution drop-down menu to specify the resolution for printing. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). The dpi setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is 600 dpi.

Color Control

The Color Control option specifies whether you want the colors in your document to be adjusted before printing so that the printed page more closely matches the colors that you see on your screen. No Image

Color Management (faster) is selected by default, and results in a faster print job.

If you click Use Image Color Management on the host (slower), the Choose Rendering Intent button becomes available. Click this button to open the Image Color Management dialog box to specify exactly how you want the colors adjusted.

The following figure shows the Image Color Management dialog box.

172 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 3-35

Image Color Management dialog box

Use the Image Color Management dialog box to specify how color images are created to produce the best-looking image on the printed page.

The following controls are available:

●

Saturation. Use this option when printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors.

● Contrast. Use this option for photographs or pictures in which the colors blend together.

●

Colorimetric. Use this option for documents that contain a color for which you need an exact match, and you are sending the document to a product that has that specific color of ink.

Halftoning

The Halftoning options specify values for the number of lines per inch (frequency) and angle of the pattern that you want to use for halftone screens.

If print jobs have a moiré pattern when you print graphics such as photographs or detailed images, you might want to adjust these settings. However, the default printer settings should work in most cases. Do not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones. To return to the default settings after you have made changes, click Use printer's settings.

Special

The Special group box contains the following options:

●

Print as a negative image. Selecting this option prints a negative of the image by complementing the RGB values or reversing the black and white values. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting.

● Print as a mirror image. Selecting this option prints a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting.

Scaling

Use the Scaling control to specify the size of the image to print. You can specify from 25% to 400% of the original size. A setting of 400%, for example, prints an image four times larger than the original.

When you enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page prints. The default setting is 100%.

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Graphics tab to their original values.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 173

Fonts tab features

The Fonts tab controls the fonts for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the

Fonts tab.

Figure 3-36

Fonts tab

The following options are available:

●

Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table

●

Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts

●

Always use TrueType fonts

Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table

Use this option to substitute a postscript printer font for the common TrueType fonts in a document. This can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. By default, common

TrueType fonts are substituted when printing, but uncommon ones are downloaded to the product. If you substitute a printer font for a TrueType font, the printed document might not match the look of the document on the screen.

Click Edit the Table… to customize which TrueType fonts are downloaded and which printer fonts should be substituted for TrueType fonts.

Font Substitution Table

Click this option to open the Font Substitution Table dialog box, which makes available the options for changing the TrueType-to-postscript font mapping. The following figure shows the Font Substitution

Table dialog box.

174 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

Figure 3-37

Font Substitution Table

Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts

Click this option to use font-matching rules to find the best printer font to substitute for TrueType fonts in your document. TrueType fonts are not downloaded when the document is printed. This can speed up printing, but the printed fonts might not exactly match the fonts on the screen.

Always use TrueType fonts

Click this option to download TrueType fonts to the product when your document is printed. This ensures that the printed document looks the same as it does on the screen, but printing might take longer. Click

Send Fonts As… to specify the format in which the TrueType fonts are sent to the product.

Send Fonts As…

Use this option to specify how TrueType fonts are downloaded.

ENWW

Figure 3-38

Send Fonts As… dialog box

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 175

The following options are available:

● Sent TrueType fonts as:. This control offers the following settings:

●

Outlines. Use this setting for scalable outlines.

●

Bitmaps. Use this setting for bitmaps.

●

Type 42. Type 42 fonts are TrueType fonts with headers that enable them to be rendered by the PS Emulation Driver.

●

Don't Send. Use this setting if you do not want any TrueType fonts to be downloaded.

●

Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels (in

pixel size at the current resolution). Use this control to specify the size of the font (in pixels) at which the PS Emulation Driver driver should switch from downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap

(Type 3) fonts to downloading them as outline (Type 1) fonts.

The most efficient threshold value varies depending on the printing resolution. For example, at 300 dpi, downloading TrueType fonts as outlines becomes efficient when fonts are about 25 points or larger. If this value is 0, outline (Type 1) fonts are always sent.

●

Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name. Use this option to specify whether to use system TrueType fonts instead of printer fonts when the same font is found on both the computer and the printer. Printer fonts are the default.

Using printer fonts can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. However, the fonts in the printed document might not exactly match the fonts on the screen.

●

Send PostScript fonts as:. Use this option to specify whether to download PostScript fonts to the printer. The following options are available:

● In Native Format. Click this option to download the PostScript font files to the product before the document prints.

●

Don't Send. If you click this option, no fonts are downloaded. This does not affect downloading of TrueType fonts.

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Fonts tab to their original values.

Device Options tab features

To gain access to the Device Options tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Device Options tab.

176 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

The Device Options tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver.

When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Device Options tab includes only the

Printer features controls. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Options tab appears as shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 3-39

Device Options tab

NOTE

Changes that you make to the Device Options tab are not reflected in the Properties settings until the modified device settings have been applied and the Properties tabs have been re-opened. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device

Options tab, click Apply, close the Properties tabs, and then re-open the Properties tabs.

The Device Options tab contains the following options:

●

Available printer memory

●

Printer features

●

Using job-storage features when printing

●

Installable options

●

Restore Defaults

NOTE

Use the dynamic Change settings for: control in the Printer features and the

Installable options sections of the Device Options tab to change the setting for the feature or option that you have selected.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 177

Available printer memory

The Available printer memory control specifies the amount of memory in the product. If the value in this control does not match the amount of memory in the printer model, use the spin box to specify the correct amount of memory.

Printer features

The Printer features group box shows settings that are specific to the printer. You can change the settings by selecting the setting you want to change and then specifying a new value in the Change

setting for list.

The following are the printer-feature settings available on this tab:

●

HPPJLEncoding

●

Job storage

●

User Name

●

PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)

●

PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)

●

PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)

●

PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)

●

●

●

●

●

Color Themes for RGB Color

●

Color Themes for CMYK Color

●

Edge Control

●

Text Neutral Grays

●

Text Halftone

●

Graphic Neutral Grays

●

Graphic Halftone

●

Photographs Neutral Grays

●

Photographs Halftone

●

Watermark (Pages per Sheet)

●

Print Watermark

●

Watermark

●

Watermark Font

178 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

●

●

●

●

●

HPPJLEncoding

The HPPJLEncoding feature contains the control for the UTF8 feature.

Job storage

The default value for this setting is Off, which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.

NOTE

The job-storage feature requires at least 128 MB of total memory or the installation of a printer hard disk. The printer hard disk is available as an optional accessory for all models.

If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:

●

Proof and Hold

●

Private Job

ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 179

Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:

●

Quick Copy

●

Stored Job

● Quick Copy. When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control panel.

NOTE

The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proofand-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick

Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

●

Proof and Hold.

When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the product control panel.

After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-andhold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

NOTE

●

Private Job. When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the job at the product control panel. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel.

After selecting Private Job from the Device Options tab, scroll to the PIN digit 1 (for Private

Job) control, click to select it, and then select a number from the Change setting for: PIN digit 1

(for Private Job) list. Repeat this process to select a number for each of the remaining three PIN digits. If you do not select a PIN, the default PIN of 0000 is used.

After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

●

Stored Job. To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

180 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it.

The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.

The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the product is turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.

You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable the job-storage feature, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, click Properties, click the Device Options tab, select Job Storage: from the Printer

features list, and then select Disabled in the Change setting for: Job Storage list.

To gain access to the Job Storage tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Start on the Windows task bar, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click

Properties.

User Name

User Name. The default value for this setting is System Name (if available). Additional values for this setting include numbers 1 through 20.

PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)

The default value for the PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using

PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)

The default value for the PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using

PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)

The default value for the PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using

PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)

The default value for the PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using

Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)

Print Color as Gray

The Print Color as Gray feature contains the following options:

●

Off (default)

●

Collate

The Collate feature contains the following options:

●

On (turn off in application)

●

Off

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 181

Fit to Page

The Fit to Page feature contains the following options:

●

Prompt User for correct size (default)

●

Nearest Size and Scale

●

Nearest Size and Crop

●

Letter

●

Color Options

The Color Options feature contains the following options:

●

Automatic (default)

●

Manual

Color Themes for RGB Color

The Color Themes for RGB Color feature contains the following options:

●

Default (sRGB). Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide

Web Consortium (WC3). Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.

●

Image Optimization (sRGB). Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vector-based graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.

●

Adobe RGB (1998). Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RGB, and documents that are produced with Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB, turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.

●

None. Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program in the operating system.

NOTE

To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.

● Custom Profile. Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.

182 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware

Color Themes for CMYK Color

The Color Themes for CMYK Color feature contains the following options:

●

Default CMYK+. Select Default CMYK+ to enable a high-quality default CMYK print path. This option can be selected for most digital commercial print jobs and should produce optimal prints.

●

SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) is a common ink standard in the United States of America and other countries/regions.

●

Euroscale, also known as Euro Standard, is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/ regions.

●

DIC. DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical) is a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/ regions.

● Custom Profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output

(for example, to emulate a specific HP Color LaserJet printer). Download color profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go

Edge Control

The Edge Control feature contains the following options:

●

Maximum

●

Normal (default)

●

Light

●

Off

Text Neutral Grays

The Text Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:

●

Text Halftone

The Text Halftone feature contains the following options:

●

Smooth

●

Detail

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 183

Graphic Neutral Grays

The Graphic Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:

●

Graphic Halftone

The Graphic Halftone feature contains the following options:

●

Smooth

●

Detail

Photographs Neutral Grays

The Photographs Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:

●

Photographs Halftone

The Photographs Halftone feature contains the following options:

●

Smooth

●

Detail

Watermark (Pages per Sheet)

The Watermark (Pages per Sheet) feature contains the following options:

●

1 (default)

●

> = 2

Print Watermark

The Print Watermark feature contains the following options:

●

No (default)

●

All Pages

●

First Page Only

184 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Watermark

The Watermark feature contains the following options:

●

None (default)

●

Draft

●

Company Confidential

●

Company Proprietary

●

Company Private

●

Confidential

●

Copy

●

Copyright

●

File Copy

●

Final

●

For Internal Use Only

●

Preliminary

●

Proof

●

Review Copy

●

Sample

●

Top Secret

●

Urgent

●

Custom

Watermark Font

The Watermark Font feature contains the following options:

●

Courier Bold

●

Helvetica Bold (default)

●

Times Bold

Watermark Size

Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. The default is 48 points.

Watermark Angle

Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90° to -90° in 15° intervals. The default is a 45° angle.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 185

Watermark Style

The Watermark Style feature contains the following options:

●

Narrow Outline

●

Medium Outline (default)

●

Wide Outline

●

Wide Halo Outline

●

Filled

Watermark Color

The Watermark Color feature contains the following options:

●

Gray

●

Red

●

Orange

●

Yellow

●

Green

●

Blue

●

Violet

Watermark Intensity

The Watermark Intensity feature contains the following options:

●

Darkest

●

Darker

●

Dark

●

Medium Dark

●

Medium

●

Medium Light

●

Light

●

Lighter

●

Lightest

186 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Using job-storage features when printing

To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:

Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.

NOTE

Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features.

Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.

Click the Job Storage tab.

Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.

Click OK.

Releasing a job-storage print job

After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press .

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

Press and to select the number of copies to print.

Press to print the job.

Deleting a job-storage print job

Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 187

Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press .

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

Press to delete the job.

Installable options

This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The following controls are available:

●

Tray 3

●

●

Mopier Mode

●

Printer Hard Disk

●

Job storage

●

VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product.

Tray 3

This control specifies whether you have an additional 500-sheet feeder tray (Tray 3) installed on the printer. The default setting is Uninstalled.

Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the following media types:

●

Transparency

●

Labels

●

Extra Heavy

●

Cardstock

●

Tough Paper

●

Envelope

NOTE

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The printer detects information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if printable information appears on the second side of the page.

188 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Mopier Mode

The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier

Mode: setting on the Device Options tab is Enabled.

Printer Hard Disk

When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode option are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.

Job storage

When the job-storage feature is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.

VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product.

The following options are available:

●

64 MB (default)

●

96 MB

●

128 MB

●

160 MB

●

192 MB

●

256 MB

●

288 MB

●

320 MB

●

384 MB

●

512 MB

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Device Options tab to their original values.

PostScript tab features

To gain access to the PostScript tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 189

Click Printers.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the PostScript tab.

The PostScript tab controls the PostScript functions for the PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the PostScript tab.

Figure 3-40

PostScript tab

The PostScript tab contains the following controls and options:

●

PostScript output format

●

PostScript header

●

Print PostScript error information

●

PostScript timeout values

●

Advanced…

●

Restore Defaults

190 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

PostScript output format

Use the PostScript output format list to specify the format for PostScript files. The following options are available:

●

PostScript (optimize for speed). Use this setting for printing most documents.

● Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document

Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different printer.

●

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from a different program.

●

Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later.

●

PJL archive format. This setting notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different printer language.

PostScript header

Use the PostScript header options to specify whether to send header information to the product each time you print a document. The following options are available:

●

Download header with each print job. This is the default setting and is sufficient or most types of printing. Use this setting if you print to a shared network product or to a file on a disk.

●

Assume header is downloaded and retained. If you print to a local printer, you can save printing time by sending the header information to the product only once.

●

Send Header Now. Click this button to send header information to the product. This option is unavailable when you specify EPS, Archive, or PJL Archive formats.

Print PostScript error information

Use the Send PostScript error information option to print postscript error messages after the document has been printed. The PS Emulation Driver can detect certain errors that Microsoft Windows cannot. If you are having printing problems, click this option. This information can help you, a system administrator, or a product-support representative determine what caused the problem. The error message information is not included in EPS format.

PostScript timeout values

Use the following options to specify the postscript timeout values for the printer.

● Job timeout. This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.

●

Wait timeout. This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 191

Advanced…

Click Advanced … to open the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box, which appears in the following figure.

Figure 3-41

Advanced PostScript Options dialog box

The following options are available on the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box:

●

PostScript Language Level

●

Bitmap compression

●

Data format

●

Send CTRL+D before job

●

Send CTRL+D after job

PostScript Language Level

The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the highest level that the product supports. Some products support multiple levels. It is usually best to select the highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more features. In some instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level-1 product, you would need to select level 1.

You can choose between PostScript Level 1 and PostScript Level 2 features for the

HP Color LaserJet 3800.

Bitmap compression

Use this control to specify whether to compress graphics before sending your document to the product.

If you are using PostScript level 2, or if you are using PostScript level 1 and a product connected to a serial port, click Compress bitmap images. If you are using PostScript level 1 and a product connected to a parallel port or if you are using a network product, click No bitmap compression.

192 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Data format

This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:

●

ASCII data. This is the default setting. When you click ASCII data, data is sent in ASCII format (7bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.

●

Binary communications protocol. When you click Binary communications protocol, the product sends all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. This format can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster than sending data in ASCII format.

If you select this option, click Send Mode to switch the product to Binary Communications Protocol

(BCP) for future print jobs.

NOTE

This option is available only if the computer is connected to the product through a direct connection (a USB or parallel cable).

●

Tagged binary communications protocol. When you click Tagged Binary Communications

Protocol, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.

● Pure binary data. When you click Pure binary data, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.

Send CTRL+D before job

This control specifies whether the product is reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product that is connected through parallel or serial ports, select the Send CTRL+D before job check box.

Send CTRL+D after job

This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network product, click to select the Send CTRL+D before job check box.

Restore Defaults

Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the PostScript tab to their original values.

HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 193

194 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW

4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows

Introduction

This chapter describes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 unidrivers. The unidrivers are the

HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver

(PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and

Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit).

NOTE

For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems

You can control print jobs from several places:

● the product control panel

● the software program print dialog box

● the driver user interface

When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.

The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver

This chapter also describes differences between the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver. Unless otherwise noted, features described here apply to all three.

This chapter contains the following sections:

●

Access to print drivers

●

Help system

●

Advanced tab features

●

Paper/Quality tab features

ENWW Introduction 195

●

Effects tab features

●

Device Settings tab features

●

Job Storage tab features

●

Color tab features

●

Services tab features

●

●

About tab features

196 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Access to print drivers

Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.

To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:

Click File.

Click Print.

Click Properties.

The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open.

You can control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. Here you have access to two sets of driver tabs: the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings that you make on the

Printing Preferences driver tabs control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Installable options can be configured in Properties driver tabs.

Printing Preferences driver tabs

The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Printing Preferences.

The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available:

●

Advanced

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Job Storage

●

Color

●

Services

The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Device Settings tab.

ENWW Access to print drivers 197

Properties driver tabs

This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties tabs, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

The following Properties print-driver tabs are available:

●

General

●

Sharing

●

Ports

●

Advanced

●

Color Management

●

Security

●

Device Settings

●

About

198 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Help system

The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a full-featured

Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.

NOTE

Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers, is not available in the

HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.

What's this? Help

Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:

● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.

●

Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.

● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.

Context-sensitive Help

When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears.

Incompatible Print Settings messages

Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls.

NOTE

In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages. Duplexing, for example, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print

Settings message.

ENWW Help system 199

Figure 4-1

An Incompatible Print Settings message

To accept the change that was just made, click the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option and then click OK. The driver resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.

If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the conflict myself and then click OK.

NOTE

In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when the driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the product.

200 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Advanced tab features

To gain access to the Advanced tab, follow these steps:

click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Printing Preferences.

Click the Advanced tab.

Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and copies in the driver

(although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab.

ENWW

Figure 4-2

The default appearance of the Advanced tab

The Advanced tab contains the following controls:

●

Paper/Output

Advanced tab features 201

●

Graphic

●

Document Options

Paper/Output

The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls:

●

Copy Count setting

●

Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count)

Copy Count

Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program.

The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.

When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.

Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.

Collated

The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.

When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of each page print together.

This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the

Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the

Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.

202 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Graphic

The Graphic setting contains the following controls:

●

Image Color Management settings

●

True Type Font settings

Image Color Management

This control lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics.

ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors before printing so that the color of images on the screen more closely match the color of those images when they are printed. The following options are available:

●

ICM Method. The ICM Method setting specifies how to print color graphics.

●

To enable Image Color Management, click the option and then select ICM Enabled.

●

If you want the host computer to perform calculations for color matching before it sends the document to the product, click ICM Handled by Host System.

●

If you want the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to perform calculations for color matching, click

ICM Handled by Printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and downloaded to the product. The product uses these rules to adjust colors in the document.

●

ICM Intent. The ICM Intent setting specifies how color images are created to produce the image that looks best on the printed page.

●

If you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors, click Graphics.

●

For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together, click Pictures to maximize the contrast.

●

If your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the document to a product that has that specific color of ink, click Proof.

●

If you want to preview the color settings from another product, click Match.

True Type Font

Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to print documents that contain TrueType fonts by using equivalent printer fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special characters that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.

Document Options

The Document Options setting contains the following controls:

●

Advanced Printing Features

●

Print Optimizations

Advanced Printing Features

When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and

Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available,

Advanced tab features 203

depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the

Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled.

Print Optimizations

NOTE

Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5

Unidriver. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.

The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your document contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly.

If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When this feature is disabled, print optimization-features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.

PostScript Options

NOTE

Print Optimization settings are available only in the PS Emulation Unidriver. They are not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver.

Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu:

●

Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting.

●

Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document

Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document is a self-contained object. This option is useful if you want to create a postscript file and print it on a different printer.

●

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from another program.

●

Archive format. Use this option to create a postscript file that you can use later.

Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop-down menu:

● Automatic. This is the default setting. The PS Emulation Driver determines which format is best.

●

Outline. Select this option if you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font.

●

Bitmap. Select this option to download the TrueType font as a bitmap font.

●

Native TrueTypeIf the printer is a TrueType rasterizer printer; select this option to download the

TrueType font as an outline font.

Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop-down menu:

●

The default setting is 3. It is usually better to select the highest number available, because it provides more features. In some instances, lower numbers might be necessary. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file is to be printed by someone with a level-1 printer, select 1.

204 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop-down menu:

● Yes. This is the default setting. When an error occurs in the print job, an error page is sent to the printer.

●

No. Select this setting if you do not want an error page to be printed when an error occurs.

Printer Features

The Printer Features setting contains the following controls:

●

Print All Text as Black

The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.

●

Send True Type as Bitmap

NOTE

The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and

HP PCL 5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.

Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble using

TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is

Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.

●

Graphics Mode

NOTE

The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.

Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings:

●

Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a combination of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higher-quality output. It is the default setting.

●

Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.

●

Alternative Letterhead Mode

When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.

When this option is selected, you must use one of the following options in the Type is setting:

●

Letterhead

●

Preprinted

Advanced tab features 205

NOTE

Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the printer is equipped with an automatic duplexing unit.

●

Raster Compression

NOTE

The Raster Compression option is available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.

Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method:

●

Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.

●

Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method.

(Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)

●

Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always use a lossy compression method (some data is lost).

Layout Options

The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting.

Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last.

NOTE

The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change.

206 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Paper/Quality tab features

To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab, follow these steps:

click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Printing Preferences.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.

ENWW

Figure 4-3

Paper/Quality tab

The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets:

●

Paper/Quality tab features 207

●

Paper Options

●

●

Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.

●

HP Digital Imaging

Print Task Quick Sets

The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the

Paper/Quality tab affects all the Printing Preferences driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick

Sets setting:

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Job Storage

●

Color

Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available). Print

Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.

NOTE

Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator

Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.

The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:

●

Default Print Settings

●

User Guide Print Settings

Default Print Settings

Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.

The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the

HP Driver

208 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer

Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for

U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets

Preconfigurable

Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Booklet Layout

Pages per Sheet

Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Available, not selected Yes

Unavailable, not selected

Unavailable, Off

1 page per sheet

Yes

Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group box

Orientation

Rotate by 180 degrees

Resizing Options

Print document on

Size to print on

Scale to Fit

Finishing tab, Orientation group box

Effects tab, Resizing Options group box

Unavailable

Portrait

Yes

Available, not selected Yes

Actual Size Yes

Available, not selected Yes

Actual Size Yes

Unavailable, selected Yes

% of Normal Size

Watermarks

Effects tab, Resizing Options group box

Effects tab

Available, not selected Yes

(none) Yes

Yes Watermarks First

Page Only

Current watermarks

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable, not selected

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

(none)

(none) Watermark

Message

Watermark

Message Angle

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Diagonal

Yes

Watermark

Message Angle

(angle)

Watermark Font

Name

Watermark Font

Color

Watermark Font

Shading

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box

(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box

Unavailable unless the Angle option is selected, 52 degrees

Arial

Gray

Very Light

Yes

Paper/Quality tab features 209

Table 4-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued)

Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for

U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets

Preconfigurable

Watermark Font

Size

Watermark Font

Style

Size is:

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box

Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box

Use Different Paper Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box

Source is:

Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box

Type is:

Economode

Contrast

Enhancement

Digital Flash

Regular

Letter

Yes

Available, not selected No

Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box

Automatically Select Yes

Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box

Unspecified Yes

Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality dialog box Available, unselected Yes

Available, Off No Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Available, Off No

SmartFocus

Sharpness

Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Available, Off

Smoothing

Unlabeled group box

Job Storage Mode

Proof and Hold

Private Job

Quick Copy

Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging

Options dialog box

Job Storage tab

Available, Off No

Status message: for example, Your job

will be printed but not stored on the printer

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Off is selected No

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Available, not selected No

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Available, not selected No

Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Available, not selected No

Stored Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Available, not selected No

Require PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box

Unavailable, not selected

Windows User

Name

Job Storage tab, User Name group box Unavailable, selected

(Windows User Name appears in field)

210 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-1

Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued)

Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for

U.S. English Print

Task Quick Sets

Preconfigurable

PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Require PIN group box Unavailable, not selected

Display Job ID when printing

Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group box

Unavailable, selected No

Job Name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box Unavailable,

Automatically selected

Color tab, Color Options group box Selected Yes Automatic (color options)

Manual (color options)

Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes

Available, not selected Yes

Normal Yes

Print in Grayscale

Edge Control

Color tab, Color Options group box

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab)

Neutral Grays (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Halftone (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Neutral Grays

(graphics)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Halftone (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Black Only

Detail

Black Only

Detail

Yes

Neutral Grays

(photographs)

Halftone

(photographs)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click

Settings on Color tab.)

4-Color

Detail

Yes

RGB Color Color tab, Color Themes group box Default (sRGB) Yes

These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools. For more information, See

HP Driver

Preconfiguration

, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw .

Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.

User Guide Print Settings

The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the

HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.

When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings:

●

On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Unspecified.

● On the Finishing tab, Print on Both Sides is set to ON.

●

On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up is set to ON.

Paper/Quality tab features 211

●

On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet.

● On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down.

Type new Quick Set name here

By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete.

NOTE

Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator

Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.

You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save more, a message box appears that states: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please

delete some before adding new ones.

Paper Options

The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are available by default.

Figure 4-4

Paper Options group box

212 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:

●

●

●

●

●

Media attributes section of this STR.

Size is

The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.

When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.

Because media-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs that do not include a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.

NOTE

Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document.

When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray.

For information about media sizes, see the

When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the

Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see the

Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter.

Custom Paper Size

The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom… on the Paper/Quality tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.

Paper/Quality tab features 213

Figure 4-5

Custom Paper Size dialog box

Name

Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.

The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:

●

If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/

Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size.

● If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the default name of "Custom."

●

If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved or the dialog box is closed.

If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click Save, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking Save, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.

Paper size

The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper

Size group box.

The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement units.

214 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Units

To change measurement units, click one of the options in the Units group box (either Inches or

Millimeters).

Custom width and height control limits

The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device.

Table 4-2

PCL 6 custom media sizes

Tray

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

Tray 3 (500-sheet)

Duplexing unit

Dimensions

Width

Height

Width

Height

Width

Height

Width

Height

Minimum

76.2 mm (3.0 inches)

127.0 mm (5.0 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

Maximum

215 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

Source is

The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the product:

●

Automatically select

●

Printer Auto Select

●

Manual Feed in Tray 1

●

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)

● Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)

●

Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)

For information about media sources, see the

Media attributes section of this STR.

Paper/Quality tab features 215

Type is

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports.

When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually

Plain.

No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the product when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the information an updated list of media types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the driver.

The following standard types appear in the list:

●

Unspecified

●

Plain

●

Preprinted

●

Letterhead

●

Transparency

●

Prepunched

●

Labels

●

Bond

●

Recycled

●

Color

●

Light 60-75 g/m2(16.4–20.5 lb)

●

Intermediate 90-104 g/m2 (24.7–28.5 lb)

●

Heavy 105-120 g/m2 (28.8–32.9 lb)

● Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m2 (32.9–44.7 lb)

●

Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (45–60.3 lb)

●

Rough

●

Glossy 106-120 g/m2 (29.1–32.9 lb)

●

Tough Paper (Glossy Film)

●

Envelope

setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR.

When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray.

216 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Use Different Paper/Covers

You can print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.

When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with the associated options:

●

Front Cover

●

First Page

●

Other Pages

●

Last Page

●

Back Cover

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.

Front Cover

Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.

The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options.

ENWW

Figure 4-6

Front Cover options

Paper/Quality tab features 217

The following are the Front Cover options:

● Size is: drop-down menu

●

Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

●

Source is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source

is: setting, see the

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the

Type is section of this

chapter.

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program.

First Page

Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document.

The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use

Different Paper/Covers check box.

218 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-7

First Page options

The following are the First Page options:

● Size is: drop-down menu

●

Source is: drop-down menu

● Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type is section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Other Pages

Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.

Paper/Quality tab features 219

Figure 4-8

Other Pages options

The following are the Other Pages options:

●

Size is: drop-down menu

●

Source is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the

information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type is section of this chapter.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the

Type is

section of this chapter.

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Last Page

Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.

220 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-9

Last Page options

The following are the Last Page options:

● Size is: drop-down menu

●

Source is: drop-down menu

● Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

Back Cover

Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.

The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options.

Paper/Quality tab features 221

Figure 4-10

Back Cover options

The following are the Back Cover options:

●

Size is: drop-down menu

●

Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

●

Source is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size

is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

NOTE

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports.

NOTE

You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/

Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/

Covers options.

When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program.

222 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs:

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

HP Digital Imaging

Click HP Digital Imaging to open the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 4-11

HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box

The following settings can be adjusted on the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box:

●

Contrast Enhancement

●

Digital Flash

●

SmartFocus

●

Sharpness

●

Smoothing

Paper/Quality tab features 223

The HP Digital Imaging settings should be used only on high-resolution images (600 dpi or higher) that are printed on photograph-quality paper. These settings are not recommended for text.

For the Contrast Enhancement, Digital Flash, SmartFocus, and Smoothing settings, the following controls are available:

●

Automatic check box

●

A slide bar ranging from Off to High

The SharpFocus settings are Off and On.

Use the following controls to enhance digital images:

●

Contrast Enhancement. Use the Contrast Enhancement setting to increase image contrast for a more visually pleasing result. This filter is useful with flat images (images in which much of the image content is compressed into a small, dynamic range of pixel values). Flat images can result from low lighting, environmental haze, or camera or scanner limitations.

●

Digital Flash. Use the Digital Flash setting to adjust lighting levels to reveal areas in shadow. The filter locates dark areas in an image and brings out detail without degrading other features in the image.

●

Sharpness. Many images are improved by increasing their sharpness. Use the Sharpness feature to make edge detail more prominent. The filter detects regions that contain significant variations in pixel value along a number of different vectors (which denotes edges) and then applies a filter to enhance detail.

● SmartFocus. Use the SmartFocus setting to increase the apparent resolution of lower resolution images. Many images that are downloaded from the Internet or from digital cameras can be compressed because of size restrictions, and might exhibit pixilation artifacts when printed.

SmartFocus upscales the image to the printer resolution without accentuating these artifacts.

●

Smoothing. Just as many images benefit from increased sharpness, many images are improved by smoothing, which decreases noise artifacts that digital cameras or scanners often create. When you select Smoothing, the filter locates areas that contain abrupt changes in pixel value by comparison with surrounding pixels (which denotes noise) and then applies a filter to smooth the output.

224 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Effects tab features

To gain access to the Effects tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Printing Preferences.

Click the Effects tab.

Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab.

ENWW

Figure 4-12

Effects tab

The Effects tab contains the following controls:

●

●

Resizing Options

Effects tab features 225

●

Quality tab features section of this STR.

●

Watermarks

Print Task Quick Sets

Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the

Paper/

Resizing Options

The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:

●

Actual Size (default)

●

Print Document On setting

●

Scale to Fit option

●

% of Normal Size setting

Actual Size

Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.

Print Document On

Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one media size and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size.

The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:

●

The % of Normal Size value is not 100.

●

The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.

When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media.

Scale to Fit

The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter.

226 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-13

Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)

When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.

% of Normal Size

The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.

Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview.

The following settings disable % of Normal Size:

●

Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected

● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs:

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

Effects tab features 227

●

Finishing

●

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

Watermarks

Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:

●

(none)

●

Confidential

●

Draft

●

SAMPLE

The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.

When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".

Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First

Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).

Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.

Figure 4-14

Watermark Details dialog box

228 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes.

Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.

Current watermarks

The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.

To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the

Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.

To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.

To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.

NOTE

You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.

When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.

To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the

Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.

Watermark Message

When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).

Message Angle

● Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.

●

Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page.

● Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric spin box to select the angle.

Effects tab features 229

Font Attributes

Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font.

The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:

●

Name

The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent.

●

Color

The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:

●

Gray

●

Red

●

Yellow

●

Green

●

Cyan

●

Blue

●

Magenta

●

Shading

The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:

●

Lightest

●

Very Light (default)

●

Light

●

Medium Light

●

Medium

●

Medium Dark

●

Dark

●

Very Dark

●

Darkest

These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select

Darkest to produce a black watermark.

●

Size

230 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent.

●

Style

The following settings are available:

●

Regular

●

Bold

●

Italic

●

Bold Italic

The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.

Default watermark settings

The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.

Table 4-3

Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks

Setting

Name

Color

Shading

Size

Style

New watermark

Arial

Gray

Very Light

Regular

Preset watermark

Varies by language

Gray

Very Light

Varies by language

Regular

Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking

Effects tab features 231

Finishing tab features

To gain access to the Finishing tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Printing Preferences.

Click the Finishing tab.

Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following figure shows the

Finishing tab.

Figure 4-15

Finishing tab

The Finishing tab contains the following controls:

●

●

Document Options

232 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

●

Paper/Quality tab features .

●

Orientation

Print Task Quick Sets

Document Options

The Document Options group box contains the following controls:

●

●

●

●

●

●

Print on Both Sides

The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist:

●

Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any media type except for the following types:

●

Labels

●

Transparency

●

Envelope

●

Extra Heavy

●

Cardstock

●

Tough Paper

●

Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes:

●

Statement

●

Envelope #10

●

Envelope DL

●

Envelope C5

●

Envelope B5

Finishing tab features 233

●

Envelope Monarch

●

Double Postscard (JIS)

Automatically printing on both sides

The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both

Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models:

● HP Color LaserJet 3800dn

●

HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn

These printer models support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.

All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types:

●

Prepunched

●

Preprinted

● Letterhead

When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.

To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as print mode. A different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic.

Manually printing on both sides

●

Manually Print on 2nd Side is not selected

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 and HP Color LaserJet 3800n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.

Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6,

PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and 8.5 x 13 only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported.

Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:

●

Plain

●

Preprinted

●

Letterhead

234 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

●

Prepunched

● Bond

●

Recycled

●

Color

●

Rough

NOTE

To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. See

Installable Options in the

Device Settings tab features section of this

chapter.

If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, you must select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided

Printing) option on the Device Settings tab.

Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.

Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.

To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.

Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.

When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 4-16

Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box

Finishing tab features 235

Flip Pages Up

Use the Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip

Pages Up check box is not available. It is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation selected on the Finishing tab.

Table 4-4

Page orientation

Orientation (Finishing tab)

Portrait

Landscape

Flip Pages Up selected

Short-edge binding

Long-edge binding

Flip Pages Up not selected

Long-edge binding

Short-edge binding

Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.

Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.

Booklet layout

The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the Paper/Quality tab:

●

Left Edge Binding

●

Right Edge Binding

When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to

4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the

Pages per Sheet section of this

chapter for more information.

Book and Booklet Printing

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports book and booklet printing.

A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,

Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use

Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other pages, and

back cover. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features

in this chapter.

A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.

236 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

To print a booklet

Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.

Click File.

Click Print.

Click Properties.

Click the Finishing tab.

Select the Print on Both Sides check box.

In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for example, Right Edge Binding).

Click OK in the print driver.

Click OK in the print dialog box to print.

Pages per Sheet

Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:

●

1 page per sheet (this is the default)

●

2 pages per sheet

●

4 pages per sheet

●

6 pages per sheet

●

9 pages per sheet

●

16 pages per sheet

NOTE

When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.

Print Page Borders

Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page

Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.

Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.

Page Order

The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:

●

Right, then Down

●

Down, then Right

Finishing tab features 237

●

Left, then Down

●

Down, then Left

The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure.

Figure 4-17

Page-order preview images

●

2 pages per sheet

●

4 pages per sheet

●

6 pages per sheet

●

9 pages per sheet

●

16 pages per sheet

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs:

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

Orientation

NOTE

Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.

238 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

The Orientation group box contains three options:

● Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.

●

Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.

●

Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.

ENWW Finishing tab features 239

Job Storage tab features

To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Printing Preferences.

Click the Job Storage tab.

NOTE

The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 128 MB of total memory is installed and configured.

Use the job-storage feature to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.

The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if job-storage feature is enabled. To support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features.

A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB is required to use the job-storage features.

Automatic Configuration section in this

chapter.

To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and

Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and then select either 96 MB, 128 MB, 160 MB, 192 MB, 256 MB, 288 MB, 320 MB, 384 MB, or 512 MB, depending on the total amount of memory currently installed.

If a hard disk has been installed, select Installed for the Printer Hard Disk under Installable

Options, and then select Installed in the drop-down menu.

Click OK to make the printer hard disk and job-storage features available.

240 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled.

You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable the jobstorage feature, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Select Job Storage.

Select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears.

NOTE

When the job-storage feature is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.

If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:

●

Proof and Hold

●

Private Job

Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed:

●

Quick Copy

●

Stored Job

The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.

Job Storage tab features 241

Figure 4-18

Job Storage tab

The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:

NOTE

This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing.

●

Using job-storage features when printing

●

Status group box

●

Job Storage Mode

●

Require PIN

●

Job Notification Options

●

User Name

●

Job Name

242 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

●

Print Task Quick Sets

Paper/

Quality tab features section of this STR.

Status group box

The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job

Storage tab.

Job Storage Mode

Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to store documents at the product and then control their printing at the product control panel.

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:

●

Off

●

Proof and Hold

●

Private Job

●

Quick Copy

●

Stored Job

These options and the settings that control them are described below.

Off

When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.

Proof and Hold

To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.

When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the product at the control panel.

Job Storage tab features 243

NOTE

Private Job

To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.

The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits.

The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.

After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.

Quick Copy

To use the Quick Copy option, a printer hard disk must be installed, and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

NOTE

Stored Job

To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature must be enabled.

Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it. The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.

244 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.

A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job.

After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control panel.

NOTE

A private stored job is not the same as a private job the previous section. Private jobs are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed. A printer hard disk is required for Private stored jobs.

Require PIN

Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a 4-digit

PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must enter the 4-digit

PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.

The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Private Job is selected. Type a 4-digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must type the 4-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.

Job Notification Options

Clicking a Job Storage Mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID

when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.

The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the product name, port, and location.

User Name

Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the User Name settings:

● Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.

The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the Windows User Name options.

●

Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than

16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the product control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.

Job Storage tab features 245

Job Name

Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The following are the Job Name settings:

●

Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the

Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which

When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the

Using job-storage features when printing

To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:

Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.

NOTE

Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features.

Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.

Click the Job Storage tab.

Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields.

Click OK.

246 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Releasing a job-storage print job

After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the product control panel.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press .

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

Press and to select the number of copies to print.

Press to print the job.

Deleting a job-storage print job

Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the product control panel.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .

Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .

Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .

Press .

If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.

Press to delete the job.

Job Storage tab features 247

Color tab features

To gain access to the Color tab, follow these steps:

click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Printing Preferences.

Click the Color tab.

Figure 4-19

Color tab

The Color tab contains the following sets of controls:

●

248 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

●

Color Options

●

Color Themes

●

Image Optimization (sRGB)

Print Task Quick Sets

The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on each Printing Preference tab, and is used to store the current combination of driver settings found on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see

Paper tab features

Color Options

●

Automatic option (default)

●

Manual option

●

Settings button (Click this button to open the Color Settings dialog box.)

●

Print in Grayscale check box

Automatic

Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The

Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color printing needs.

Manual

To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color

Settings dialog box appears.

Color tab features 249

Figure 4-20

Color Settings dialog box

The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls:

●

General

●

Edge Control

●

Text

●

Neutral Grays

●

Halftone

●

Graphics

●

Neutral Grays

●

Halftone

●

Photographs

●

Neutral Grays

●

Halftone

General

Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.

250 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:

● Adaptive Halftoning, which increases edge sharpness

●

Trapping, which reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects

● Color Resolution Enhancement Technology (C-REt), which increases the apparent resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges

The Edge Control option offers four settings:

● Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.

●

Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is set to On.

● Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to

On, and C-REt is set to On.

●

Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On, and C-REt is set to On.

Neutral Grays

●

Halftone

The Halftone setting controls the selection of a product-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the product mixes the four primary colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently.

The following Halftone options are available:

●

Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option for sharp edges and detail.

●

Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area fills.

Color Themes

The Color Themes group box contains the following settings:

Color tab features 251

●

Default (sRGB)

●

●

Adobe RGB (1998)

●

None

●

Custom Profile

Default (sRGB)

Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.

Image Optimization (sRGB)

Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vectorbased graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.

Adobe RGB (1998)

Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RBG, and documents that are produced with

Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB , turn off the color management in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.

None

NOTE

To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.

Custom Profile

Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict and control color output.

The default Custom Profile is an emulation of the color table used on the HP LaserJet 4650 printer. The printer holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.

You can download custom profiles from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware

252 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

Document preview image

The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs:

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.

When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.

ENWW Color tab features 253

Services tab features

To gain access to the Services tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Printing Preferences.

Click the Services tab.

The Services tab is shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-21

Services tab

The Services tab contains the following group boxes:

●

Internet Services

●

Device services

254 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Internet Services

The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the following selections:

●

Online diagnostic tools. This is the HP Instant Support Web site, where you can find interactive tools and contacts for troubleshooting.

●

Support and troubleshooting. This is the main Web site for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer support.

●

Product manuals. View or download HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer manuals.

●

Check for driver updates. Automatically check your print drivers to see whether the correct and most up-to-date print drivers are installed.

●

Color printing access/usage. Find information about enabling and disabling color printing and tracking color print-job usage.

●

Order supplies. Shop online for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supplies.

If you have Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding HP Web page.

Device services

Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS. For more information, see

HP Embedded Web Server .

Click the Print color usage job log icon to print a page that shows information about users, print jobs, and applications that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

Services tab features 255

Device Settings tab features

The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the Device

Settings tab, follow these steps:

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Available options depend on the feature. The following figure shows the Device Settings tab.

Figure 4-22

Device Settings tab

The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:

●

Form to Tray Assignment options

●

Font Substitution Table option

●

External Fonts option

●

Installable Options options

256 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Form to Tray Assignment

A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray.

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form

(which defines the media size and margins) to each media source. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.

Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs.

This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.

The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting.

The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.

Configuring the trays

Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.

Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.

Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.

Font Substitution Table

Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.

Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts, as show in the following figure. Use the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.

Device Settings tab features 257

Figure 4-23

Font Substitution Table

External Fonts

NOTE

The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.

Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.

Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available. Click Properties to open the

HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

258 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Figure 4-24

HP Font Installer dialog box

Installing external fonts

Follow these steps to install external fonts.

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and

Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the name of the product.

Click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.

Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.

Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click Browse to locate the file on the computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be

Added window.

10.

Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names appear in the Installed Font(s) window.

11.

Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.

Removing external fonts

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and

Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the name of the product.

Device Settings tab features 259

Click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.

Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window.

Select the fonts that you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.

10.

Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.

PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings

The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab.

Available PostScript Memory

This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration page. To print a configuration page from the product control panel, follow these steps:

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press

Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.

Press to print the configuration page.

Output Protocol

This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:

●

ASCII (default)

●

TBCP

●

Binary

When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.

When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.

When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.

260 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job

This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document.

The default setting is No. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.

Send Ctrl-D After Each Job

This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is Yes. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change

Yes to No.

Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray

This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in text to the gray provided by the

PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available:

●

Yes

●

No. This is the default setting.

Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray

This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in graphics to the gray provided by the PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available:

●

Yes

●

No. This is the default setting.

Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts

This control specifies whether to add the Euro symbol to the printer fonts. The following settings are available:

●

Yes. This is the default setting.

●

Job Timeout

This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.

Wait Timeout

This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer.

After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value.

If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.

Device Settings tab features 261

Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline

This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the

Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.

Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline

This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type

1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.

Installable Options

This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The following controls are available:

●

Automatic Configuration (Off by default)

●

Tray 3

●

Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)

●

Allow Manual Duplexing

●

Printer Memory

●

Printer Hard Disk

●

Job Storage

●

Mopier Mode

●

Postscript Pull through (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

Automatic Configuration

Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the

Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.

If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.

If you have more than one driver installed for the product (for example, the default HP PCL 6 Unidriver and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for the specific product model.

262 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

ENWW

Tray 3

This control specifies whether you have tray 3, an additional 500-sheet tray, installed on the product.

The default setting is Not Installed.

Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)

The HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models come with a duplex unit installed. This setting is enabled (Installed) by default.

NOTE

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page.

Allow Manual Duplexing

This setting is enabled by default.

Printer Memory

This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept. The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.

Printer Hard Disk

When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel.

The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.

Job storage

When Job Storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel.

Mopier Mode

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled.

Device Settings tab features 263

When you use the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, or PS Emulation Unidriver, mopying is performed in one of two ways: either through the software or through the product hardware. When the mopier is enabled, mopying takes place through the product hardware by default. One copy of a multiplepage print job is transmitted once through the network to the product, together with a printer job language

(PJL) command directing the product to make the specified number of copies.

When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which the driver can still perform through the software rather than the product hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, a multiple-copy print job that is sent when the mopier is disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the job is sent through the network for each copy.

Mopier mode and collation

Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. Mopying, the ability to send original print jobs to the product, is performed by the print driver. Collating can be controlled by either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to

Disabled.

Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the

Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.

To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.

The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear.

Table 4-5

Driver mopier mode and collation settings

Mopier mode

Disabled

Enabled

Application collation

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Driver collation

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Not selected

Selected

Expected result

3 copies uncollated

3 copies collated

3 copies uncollated

3 copies collated

Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript passthough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some software programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send postscript

264 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

information to the printer that cannot be controlled by the driver. Other programs might print using these options without problems. Select Disabled and print the document again if you encounter problems.

NOTE

In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results within a software program.

ENWW Device Settings tab features 265

About tab features

The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers

and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware

Devices (Windows XP Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.

Click Start.

Select Settings.

Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows

Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click the About tab.

The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components.

The information varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 model number, driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-25

About tab

The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.

266 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW

5 Installing Windows printing-system components

Introduction

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft® Windows and

Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system

software installation for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, see Supported operating systems

This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printingsystem software for Windows operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:

●

Windows

●

Font support

●

General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems

●

Installing from the printing-system CD

●

Installing from a network or from downloaded files

●

Detailed Windows installation

●

Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence

●

Installing print drivers by using Add Printer

●

Installer Customization Wizard for Windows

●

Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003

●

Setting a default printer

NOTE

If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the

corresponding 64-bit print driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer .

ENWW Introduction 267

Font support

The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts that are available on the CD that came with the product.

Basic fonts

Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing product:

●

Arial

●

Courier New Italic

●

Times New Roman Italic

●

Arial Italic

●

Courier New Bold

●

Times New Roman Bold

●

Arial Bold

●

Courier New Bold Italic

●

Times New Roman Bold Italic

●

Arial Bold Italic

●

Symbol

●

Wingdings

●

Courier New

●

Times New Roman

Default fonts

The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software.

Table 5-1

Default fonts

Font name

Albertus Extra Bold

Albertus Medium

Antique Olive

CG Omega

Font style

Regular

Bold

Italic

Regular

Bold

File name

ALBR85W.TTF

ALBR55W.TTF

OLVR55W.TTF

OLVR75W.TTF

OLVR56W.TTF

CGOR45W.TTF

CGOR65W.TTF

268 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Table 5-1

Default fonts (continued)

Font name

CG Omega

CG Times

Clarendon Condensed

Coronet

CourierPS

Garamond

Helvetica®

Helvetica

Helvetica Narrow

Helvetica

ITC Avant Garde Gothic

ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi

ITC Bookman Light

ITC Bookman Demi

ITC Zapf Chancery

ITC Zapf Dingbats

Font style

Kursiv Halbfett

Regular

Bold

Bold Oblique

Regular

Bold

Bold Oblique

Oblique

Book

Book Oblique

Regular

Oblique

Regular

Italic

Regular

Italic

Medium Italic

Regular

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Bold

Regular

Bold

Bold Oblique

Oblique

Antiqua

Halbfett

Kursiv

File name

GARR66W.TTF

HELR45W.TTF

HELR65W.TTF

HELR66W.TTF

HELR47W.TTF

HELR67W.TTF

HELR68W.TTF

HELR48W.TTF

HELR46W.TTF

AVGR45W.TTF

AVGR46W.TTF

AVGR65W.TTF

AVGR66W.TTF

BOKR35W.TTF

BOKR36W.TTF

BOKR75W.TTF

BOKR76W.TTF

CHANC___.TTF

DINGS___.TTF

CGOR66W.TTF

CGOR46W.TTF

CGTR45W.TTF

CGTR65W.TTF

CGTR66W.TTF

CGTR46W.TTF

CLAR67W.TTF

CORONET.TTF

CPSR45W.TTF

CPSR65W.TTF

CPSR66W.TTF

CPSR46W.TTF

GARR45W.TTF

GARR65W.TTF

GARR46W.TTF

Font support 269

Table 5-1

Default fonts (continued)

Font name

Letter Gothic

Marigold

New Century Schoolbook

Palatino

SymbolPS

Times*

Times

Univers

Univers Condensed

Univers

Font style

Roman

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Roman

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Bold

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Roman

Bold

Bold Italic

Bold

Bold Italic

Medium

Medium Italic

Medium

Medium Italic

File name

LETR45W.TTF

LETR65W.TTF

LETR46W.TTF

MARIGOLD.TTF

NCSR75W.TTF

NCSR76W.TTF

NCSR56W.TTF

NCSR55W.TTF

PALR65W.TTF

PALR66W.TTF

PALR46W.TTF

PALR45W.TTF

SYMPS__.TTF

TIMR65W.TTF

TIMR66W.TTF

TIMR46W.TTF

TIMR45W.TTF

UNVR65W.TTF

UNVR66W.TTF

UNVR67W.TTF

UNVR68W.TTF

UNVR57W.TTF

UNVR58W.TTF

UNVR55W.TTF

UNVR56W.TTF

Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.

Table 5-2

Additional PS emulation fonts

Font name

Albertus MT

Albertus MT Lt

Antique Olive CompactPS

Font style

Regular

Italic

Regular

File name

PS_12639.TTF

PS_12640.TTF

PS_14530.TTF

PS_11120.TTF

270 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Table 5-2

Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)

Font name

Antique Olive Roman

Apple Chancery

Bodoni Poster

Bodoni PosterCompressed

BodoniPS

Candid

Chicago

Clarendon Light

ClarendonPS

Cooper Black

Copperplate32bc

Copperplate33bc

CoronetPS

Eurostile

Eurostile Bold

Eurostile ExtendedTwo

Geneva

GillSans

GillSans Condensed

GillSans ExtraBold

GillSans

GillSans Light

Font style

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Bold

Regular

Italic

Regular

Italic

Regular

Bold

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Bold

Regular

Bold

Italic

Regular

File name

PS_10369.TTF

PS_10370.TTF

PS_14514.TTF

PS_14515.TTF

PS_10249.TTF

PS_10267.TTF

PS_10268.TTF

PS_14512.TTF

PS_14511.TTF

PS_24509.TTF

PS_13872.TTF

PS_13874.TTF

PS_13875.TTF

PS_14053.TTF

PS_14054.TTF

PS_14051.TTF

PS_13873.TTF

PS_13871.TTF

PS_13870.TTF

PS_11119.TTF

PS_11118.TTF

PS_11846.TTF

PS_24516.TTF

PS_12704.TTF

PS_14508.TTF

PS_12581.TTF

PS_12585.TTF

PS_12586.TTF

PS_12582.TTF

PS_24517.TTF

PS_24518.TTF

PS_14513.TTF

PS_10269.TTF

PS_12968.TTF

Font support 271

Table 5-2

Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)

Font name

Joanna MT

Letter Gothic

Letter GothicPS

Lubalin Graph

MarigoldPS

Mona Lisa Recut

Monaco

New York

Optima

Goudy

Goudy ExtraBold

Goudy

Helvetica Condensed

Hoefler Text

Hoefler Text Black

Hoefler Text

Hoefler Text Ornaments

Joanna MT

Font style

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Bold Italic

Italic

Regular

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Italic

Regular

Bold

272 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components

File name

PS_14505.TTF

PS_14506.TTF

PS_14504.TTF

PS_13778.TTF

PS_13777.TTF

PS_13779.TTF

PS_13780.TTF

PS_12675.TTF

PS_12677.TTF

PS_12625.TTF

PS_12623.TTF

PS_94073.TTF

PS_14525.TTF

PS_24524.TTF

PS_24510.TTF

PS_12506.TTF

PS_12510.TTF

PS_12511.TTF

PS_12507.TTF

PS_12544.TTF

PS_10695.TTF

PS_12542.TTF

PS_12545.TTF

PS_12543.TTF

PS_14526.TTF

PS_14528.TTF

PS_14529.TTF

PS_14527.TTF

PS_24519.TTF

PS_24521.TTF

PS_24522.TTF

PS_24520.TTF

PS_24523.TTF

PS_14503.TTF

ENWW

Table 5-2

Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)

Font name

Oxford

StempelGaramond Roman

Taffy

Univers 45 Light

Univers 47 CondensedLight

Univers 55

Univers 57 Condensed

Univers ExtendedPS

Font style

Bold

Bold Italic

Italic

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Italic

Regular

Italic

Regular

Bold

Bold Italic

Regular

Italic

Bold

Regular

Bold Italic

Italic

File name

PS_14072.TTF

PS_11546.TTF

PS_11545.TTF

PS_11547.TTF

PS_11548.TTF

PS_14507.TTF

PS_13501.TTF

PS_14023.TTF

PS_14024.TTF

PS_13502.TTF

PS_14030.TTF

PS_14040.TTF

PS_14021.TTF

PS_14022.TTF

PS_14029.TTF

PS_14039.TTF

PS_13548.TTF

PS_13547.TTF

PS_14481.TTF

PS_14480.TTF

Font support 273

Installation instructions

The following sections provide instructions for installing the print drivers on various Windows operating systems.

General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems

Installation is similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating systems. The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

NOTE

The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and the

PS Emulation Driver are available on the printing-system software CD. For more information, see the

Installing print drivers by using Add Printer section in this chapter.

If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP

LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication and some driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems.

For Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software.

When the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system.

Installing from the printing-system CD

Follow these instructions to install the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing system from the CD that came with the product.

Quit all software programs.

Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.

NOTE

If the CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.

Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.

Installing from a network or from downloaded files

Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing-system software file.

Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.

Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.

Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For detailed

installation instructions, see Detailed Windows installation

274 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Detailed Windows installation

This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose to install the software by using either a Basic, Full, or Custom Installation.

Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons

Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions for and explanations about the installation process.

Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific dialog box depends on your previous selections.

After you select any options on a given screen, click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the installation sequence.

To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any installation dialog box.

When you click Cancel, a dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?”

Figure 5-1

Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box

When you click Yes, the Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was interrupted.

ENWW

Figure 5-2

Cancel dialog box

Click Finish to close the installation screens.

Installation instructions 275

The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context in the following sections.

Modifying a pre-existing installation

If an HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer has been installed previously on your system, the appearance of the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install-printer setting changes to modify

installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are presented, depending on the selections you make.

Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port

The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation.

Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence

NOTE

The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Professional installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.

The Full Installation includes the following components:

●

HP Color LaserJet 3800 PCL 6 Driver

● HP Easy Printer Care

●

Screen Fonts

● Install Notes

●

User Guide

When you select the Install Printer option from the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software

CD, the Language Selection dialog box appears.

Figure 5-3

Language Selection dialog box

NOTE

The Language Selection dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD.

276 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

The installer automatically detects the language that the computer system uses and presents this selection as the default.

You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the dropdown menu.

Click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome dialog box appears.

Figure 5-4

Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Setup Wizard dialog box

NOTE

The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. If you try to install the printer in a Windows NT 4.0 environment, the following screen appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-5

Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System

Installation instructions 277

When installing the product on a supported operating system, click Next on the Welcome screen to continue the installation. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-6

Software License Agreement dialog box

The I disagree option is selected by default. Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to proceed with the installation.

The Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-7

Printer Connection dialog box

278 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

NOTE

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer does not support infrared connections.

If you click USB Cable (a "direct connection" using a USB 2.0 cable), and then click Next, the

Installation Type dialog box opens. This is the default option.

If you click Parallel Cable (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable), and then click Next, the

Installation Type dialog box opens.

To continue with the default installation sequence, see

Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box

NOTE

If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over the network, click Wired Networking in the

Printer Connection dialog box.

For a network installation, the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer must be connected to the network and turned on before the printing-system software is installed so that the software can detect the printer.

NOTE

For wireless installation instructions using an HP Jetdirect ew2400 802.11g Wireless

Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802.11B wireless print server, consult the documentation that comes with the print server.

Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 5-8

Searching dialog box

Installation instructions 279

NOTE

If you are installing the product over a network, you must let the search for the first subnet in the network finish in order to find all available printers. After the first subnet is scanned for available HP Color LaserJet 3800 printers, the results appear in the Printers Found dialog box.

However, the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the first results appear. The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within about 20 seconds. It might take some time for the installer to search the other subnets and for the full list of printers to appear in the Printers Found dialog box (see

Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box ),

depending on the configuration of the network.

NOTE

The installation process includes the option of using the TCP/IP address for the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, which might be preferable to waiting for the installer to finish the search.

If the network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Firewall Detected dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-9

Firewall Detected dialog box

If you are performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Printer Not Found dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

280 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Figure 5-10

Printer Not Found dialog box

The product might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the printer is connected and is turned on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall, click Next.

The Searching dialog box appears (see

Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box

If a printer is found, the Printers Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.

Installation instructions 281

Figure 5-11

Printers Found dialog box

Select the printer that you want to install and click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box ).

If the printer is that you want to install is not listed and you want the installer to continue searching network subnet masks, click Search Again…. The Check Printer Connection screen appears.

Click Next to perform another search.

If the printer that you want to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Next. The

Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens. See Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box

and follow the instructions for changing the TCP/IP address.

If a single printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.

282 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Figure 5-12

Printer Found dialog box

If you click No, I want to install a different printer and then click Next, the Check Printer

Connection dialog box opens, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving

you the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address (see Figure

5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box ).

If you click Yes, install this printer and then click Next, the Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 5-13

Confirm Network Settings dialog box

Installation instructions 283

In the Confirm Network Settings dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Installation

Type dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box ).

If you click Change Settings…, the Confirm Change Setting dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

WARNING!

When you change the TCP/IP configuration by using the Change Settings button, you change the actual settings in the product Jetdirect card. You should make changes to these settings only with the advice of your network administrator.

Figure 5-14

Confirm Changing Setting dialog box

If you click No, the Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box

If you click Yes, the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP

Settings dialog box ).

The Check Printer Connection dialog box, which appears if you selectedNo, I want to install a

different printer in the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the product over the network, is shown in the following figure.

284 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Figure 5-15

Check Printer Connection dialog box

If you click Search again for all available printers and then click Next, the Searching dialog box opens

(see Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box

If you click Specify Printer by address and then click Next, the Specify Printer dialog box opens. The

Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure.

If you click Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next, the Printer

Settings dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box ).

ENWW

Figure 5-16

Specify Printer dialog box

Installation instructions 285

You can specify a printer by clicking one of the following options and typing in the required information:

●

Hardware Address (MAC)

●

IP Address

●

IP Hostname

When you click Next, the Searching dialog box opens. When the search is finished, the Printer

Found dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box ).

If you clicked Enter settings for a printer not on the network in the Check Printer Connection dialog box and then clicked Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-17

Printer Settings dialog box

To install the printer by using the hardware address, click Hardware Address (MAC), type the product hardware address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

To install the printer using the TCP/IP address, click IP Address, type the product TCP/IP address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

286 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Figure 5-18

Set Port Name dialog box

Type a port name in the Port Name: field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box (see

Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box ).

Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20

Installation Type dialog box ).

NOTE

If you selected Yes in the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box (see Figure 5-14

Confirm Changing Setting dialog box

), the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

Installation instructions 287

Figure 5-19

Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box

If you make a change in the IP Address:, Subnet Mask:, or Gateway: fields (without clicking Next) and then click Suggest Settings…, the fields refresh with information that was found by the installer and reported in the Printer Found screen.

Type a different TCP/IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address and then click Next to open the

Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see

Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box ).

If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog box opens

(see

Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box ).

Figure 5-20

Installation Type dialog box

288 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

NOTE

The components of a Full Installation might vary from product to product.

Click Basic Installation to install only the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003) or the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver (Windows 98 and Windows Me) screen fonts. If you click Basic Installation and then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box ).

If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 5-21

Drivers dialog box

An empty check box indicates that the feature is not installed. A check mark appears when you select an install state for that feature.

Information about the space required and the space available on your hard drive appears in the dialog box.

Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.

It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver).

Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Additional Software dialog box opens.

To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.

Installation instructions 289

Figure 5-22

Driver Details dialog box

All the drivers that are available in the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click

OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.

In the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears.

Figure 5-23

Additional Software dialog box

290 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-24

Additional software Details dialog box

All the software that is available in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.

Click Next to open the Ready to Install dialog box.

Installation instructions 291

Figure 5-25

Ready to Install dialog box

Click Install to start the installation process.

Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:

●

General

●

Sharing

Figure 5-26

Printer PropertiesGeneraltab

On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field.

292 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.

If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer

as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.

Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network.

ENWW

Figure 5-27

Printer Properties Sharing tab

On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click the Shared as: option and type the printer name in the text field.

NOTE

When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share the printer on Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by clicking Shared as, you must type a name. You can also provide additional print driver support for other operating systems.

If you click Shared as in the Sharing tab of the Printer Properties dialog box, the text box becomes available. Type the share name and then click Next. The Ready to Install dialog box opens.

NOTE

To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7 characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single pagedescription language (PDL), or 72 charaters for multiple PDLs.

If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional

Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.

If you are installing the printer in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or a Windows Server 2003 operating environment and you want to install additional drivers for Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Additional

Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.

Installation instructions 293

Figure 5-28

Additional Drivers dialog box

NOTE

If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK.

The Additional Drivers dialog box does not appear if the computer is running Windows 98 or

Windows Me.

In the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printingsystem software folders and files. The Installing HP Color LaserJet 3800 dialog box is shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-29

Installing dialog box

This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.

Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.

At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.

294 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-30

Finish dialog box

Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.

NOTE

Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-31

HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box

NOTE

If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 over a direct connection and HP Easy

Printer Care was not installed earlier, an option for installing HP Easy Printer Care appears on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box.

Installation instructions 295

To verify that the printer is connected, click Print Driver Test Page. The Test Page dialog box appears.

Figure 5-32

Test Page dialog box

If the test page prints correctly, click OK to continue. If it does not print, click Troubleshoot… to open screens that guide you through options to find the source of the problem.

If you have access to the Internet, you can register your product online. In the Congratulations dialog box, click Register Product to open the HP Registration Web site.

296 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

Figure 5-33

HP Registration screen

Installing print drivers by using Add Printer

Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows:

Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.

Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows.

In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. The

Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.

In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click

Printers, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.

Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process.

Installation instructions 297

If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature.

Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.

Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes, and then click Add a

printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.

Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process.

Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the print-driver files on the software CD, as shown in the following list:

● To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, select the following file:

\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc90xmd.inf

●

To install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, select the following file:

\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5\hpc90xmd.inf

●

To install the PS Emulation Unidriver, select the following file:

\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc90xmd.inf

Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.

Installer Customization Wizard for Windows

Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To start the utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser. Using this option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any of the following selections:

●

Language

●

Operating system

●

Print drivers

●

Components

NOTE

For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device

Installer Customization Wizard, which is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800

Running the Installer Customization Wizard

The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be started from the CD browser, depending on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from the common Microsoft Installer (MSI) with its own interface.

Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file

(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be directly edited for

298 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

system-configuration differences. The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800

To run the Installer Customization Wizard

Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 software CD in the CD-ROM drive.

In the CD browser main screen, click Installer Customization Wizard.

The Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard screen appears.

To complete the installation, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following section.

Figure 5-34

Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard screen

Dialogs

Click Next in the Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard dialog box. The Language Selection dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-35

Language Selection dialog box

Installation instructions 299

Select the language and then click OK. The Software Licence Agreement dialog box appears.

Figure 5-36

Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box

To cancel the installation, click Cancel on this or any other screen where it appears (see

Using the Help,

Back, Next, and Cancel buttons ).

Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to open the Language dialog box.

Figure 5-37

Language dialog box

300 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

NOTE

The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language that is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance mode on systems where installation has been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new product must be installed in order to restore the option to install other languages.

The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the text in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Language Selection dialog box earlier). The Language dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Language Selection dialog box, but any language that is available on the CD can be selected for the customized installer. The language selection is recorded in the response file.

Click Next to open the Printer Port dialog box, as shown in the following figure.

Click Back on this or any screen where it appears to return to a previous screen.

ENWW

Figure 5-38

Printer Port dialog box

Click Network Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry. If you click Network

Path and click the Browse, the Browse for Printer dialog box opens.

Installation instructions 301

Figure 5-39

Browse for Printer dialog box

Navigate to a printer and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field in the Printer Port dialog box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box.

In the Printer Port dialog box, click Local (direct connect) port and then click Next to open the Printer

Connection dialog box. The Printer Connection dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support.

Figure 5-40

Printer Connection dialog box

Click the type of connection that you are using and then click Next to open the Drivers dialog box. See

Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box .

302 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

In the Printer Port dialog box, click New TCP/IP Port and then click Next to open the Specify TCP/IP

Port dialog box. The Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used.

ENWW

Figure 5-41

Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box

Click IP Address to make the field available for typing the TCP/IP address for the printer. Only numerals are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one digit in the IP Address field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP address.

Click IP Hostname to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. Any characters are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP hostname.

Click Hardware Address to make the field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It accepts any characters but limits the entry to 12 characters. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the Hardware Address: field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid hardware address.

After you select any the options, type the appropriate name or address, and then click Next, the

Drivers dialog box opens (see

Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box ).

For each of the options in the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, you can either use the default port name

(as specified in each of the three options) or specify a different name.

If you click Use Default and click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens. See

Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box

To specify a different name, click Specify: and click Next to open the Port Creation Options dialog box.

Installation instructions 303

Figure 5-42

Port Creation Options dialog box

Click No, do no create the port (the printer will not be installed) if you do not want to create a port.

Click Yes, create the port and click Next to open the Drivers dialog box.

If the printer cannot be found, type the printer hardware address in the Hardware Address field and click Next.

NOTE

To print a configuration page where the printer hardware address is listed, see

Determining the current level of firmware .

Figure 5-43

Drivers dialog box

304 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.

To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-44

Driver Details dialog box

All the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click

OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.

On the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears.

Installation instructions 305

Figure 5-45

Additional Software dialog box

To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box appears.

Figure 5-46

Additional software Details dialog box

All the software that you selected in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.

306 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

In the Additional Software dialog box, click Next to open the Custom Installer Location dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-47

Custom Installer Location dialog box

Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is large, but is limited as to the number of characters that it can accommodate.

To change the physical location of the printer, click Browse…, navigate to the folder that you want, and click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box.

Click Next to open the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Figure 5-48

Ready to Create Installer dialog box

Installation instructions 307

NOTE

The location for the installer package defaults to c:\<name of printer>

NOTE

During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the directory that appears in the Location field. Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing.

Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:

●

General

●

Sharing

Figure 5-49

Printer Properties General tab

On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name: field.

Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.

If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer

as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.

Click OK to return to the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network.

The Sharing tab is shown in the following figure.

308 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

Figure 5-50

Printer Properties Sharing tab

On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click Shared as: and type the printer name in the text field.

NOTE

If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional

Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.

ENWW

Figure 5-51

Additional Drivers dialog box

If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK.

Installation instructions 309

In the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing-system software folders and files. The Installing dialog box is shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-52

Installing dialog box

This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.

Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.

At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.

When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-53

Finish dialog box

Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.

310 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.

Distribution

The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD, except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected. The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted.

You can perform the silent installation in two ways:

●

Customized silent installer

● Command-line silent installer

The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The name cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer package.

The end-user cannot customize the command-line silent installer. It installs the printing-system components that are included in the Full Installation.

The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the

RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj3800

Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003

The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the product on the network.

Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.

This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.

Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 processor types.

To install the print driver on a Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the

Windows 2000 server, you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows 2000

Printer .INF file must contain the same product name as the Windows 98 or Windows Me printer .INF

file.

Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or

Windows Me PS Driver V4.0 or later.

In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers are running in the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.

Installation instructions 311

However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver that is different from the one on the print server.

In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode processes. Usermode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate (or “crash”) only the process in which it is running—not the whole operating system. Because access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.

www.techweb.boi.hp.com

Setting a default printer

This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and

Windows Server 2003 operating systems.

In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000 operating systems, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Printers

and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP

Home).

Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer.

Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.

312 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW

6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems

Introduction

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple

Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software installation for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, see

Supported operating systems

This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printingsystem software for Macintosh operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:

●

Macintosh component descriptions

●

Installing the Macintosh printing system

●

Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system

●

In-box disk layout

●

Mac OS X Classic installation

●

Mac OS X installation

ENWW Introduction 313

Macintosh component descriptions

The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers:

●

PPDs for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later

●

PDEs for Mac OS X only (V10.1.5 and later)

HP LaserJet PPDs

In Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 are installed to the Printer Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder within the System folder.

In Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/

Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.

The PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product. A print setup tool for the PPDs is provided on the printing-system software CD. For information about the print setup tools in various Macintosh operating systems, see

Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems

PDEs

Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later only) that provide access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.

HP Embedded Web Server

Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) supports the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS). Use the

HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform the following tasks:

●

Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings.

●

Set a password for the product.

●

From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see the printing-software help).

Install notes

This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printingsystem software, and technical assistance.

Online help

This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with

Mac OS 9.x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center.

314 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Screen fonts

The printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems no longer includes a font installer. The

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer uses previously installed system fonts when it is installed on a Macintosh computer.

ENWW Macintosh component descriptions 315

Installing the Macintosh printing system

On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are basically the same for a network administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer.

NOTE

If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP Color LaserJet 3800, connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed. Macintosh operating systems do not support parallel connections.

The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate language for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that language.

NOTE

Detailed installation steps can be found in Mac OS X Classic installation or

Mac OS X installation

Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the

Macintosh OS

Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

NOTE

If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp color LaserJet

3800 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.

Double-click the icon for your OS. For instance, if you are installing the printer in any version of

Mac OS X, double-click the Mac OS X icon. If you are installing the printer in Mac Classic or any version of Mac OS 9, click the Mac OS 9 icon.

NOTE

The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the

Authenticate dialog box (Mac OS X, V10.1.5 and later only).

The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation.

NOTE

If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system, be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.

When software installation is complete, click Quit. Select one of the following options to finish setting up the product:

● Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic).

●

Set up a printer with Mac OS X.

The software program that you use to finish setting up the printer varies by operating system. The following table shows the print setup tools that are available.

316 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Table 6-1

Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems

Operating System

Mac OS 9 V9.2.2

(Mac OS X Classic)

Mac OS X V10.1.5

Mac OS X V10.2.8

Mac OS X V10.3.9

Mac OS X V10.4.1

HP LaserJet Utility

LaserWriter 8

x x x x

Print Center

x x

Printer Setup Utility

Setting up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9. V9.2.2

(Mac OS X Classic)

Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu.

Click the appropriate print setup tool (see

Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems ) on the left side of the Chooser dialog box.

Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required.

Click your product name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box, and then click Create. For the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, the selection is HP Color LaserJet

470014.

ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 317

Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4

In the Applications folder, open the Utilities Folder, and then run the Printer Browser or the Printer

Setup Utility, depending on the version of the Macintosh operating system.

Figure 6-1

Printer Browser screen

318 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Select the product and click Add. The Installable Options screen appears.

ENWW

Figure 6-2

Installable Options screen

If the product has the optional 500-sheet tray 3, select Installed in the Tray 3 drop-down menu.

In the Memory Configuration: drop-down menu, select the amount of memory that is installed in the product:

●

64 MB RAM

●

96 MB RAM

●

128 MB RAM

●

160 MB RAM

●

192 MB RAM

Installing the Macintosh printing system 319

●

256 MB RAM

●

288 MB RAM

●

320 MB RAM

●

384 MB RAM

●

512 MB RAM

If the product has a duplex unit (a standard feature on the HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and the

HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn models), select the Duplex Unit check box.

In the Printer Disk: drop-down menu, select the appropriate option:

●

None

●

RAM Disk

● Hard Disk (A hard disk is an optional feature for all HP Color LaserJet 3800 models.)

In the Paper Matching: drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

●

Prompt User for correct size

●

Nearest Size & Scale

●

Nearest Size & Crop

After you have selected the settings in the Installable Options screen, click Continue. The Printer

Browser screen shows the following tabs:

●

Default Browser

●

IP Printer

320 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

ENWW

Figure 6-3

Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab

In the Name: field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

10.

In the Location: field, type the product location.

11.

In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options:

● Auto Select (This is the default setting.)

●

Generic PostScript Printer

● Other (Select the appropriate brand name.)

12.

Click Add to save the settings.

Installing the Macintosh printing system 321

13.

If you want to search for additional printers, click More Printers. The Printer Browser search dialog box opens.

Figure 6-4

More Printers screen

14.

Use the drop-down menus to change the search settings. Select the printer that you want to install and click Add.

To cancel the search, click Cancel.

322 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

15.

To connect the printer through its TCP/IP address, click the IP Printer tab.

ENWW

Figure 6-5

IP Printer tab

16.

In the Search field in the upper-right corner, select one of the following options:

●

All (this is the default setting)

●

AppleTalk

●

Bonjour

●

FireWire®

●

Open Directory

●

Shared

●

USB

17.

In the Protocol: drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

●

Internet Printing Protocol – IPP

●

Line Printer Daemon – LPD

●

HP Jet Direct – Socket

Installing the Macintosh printing system 323

18.

If you know the host name or TCP/IP address of the product, type it in the Address: field. (It might also be available on the drop-down menu.)

19.

If you know the queue path of the printer, type it in the Queue: field.

20.

In the Name: field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

21.

In the Location: field, type the product location.

22.

In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options:

●

Auto Select (This is the default setting.)

●

Generic PostScript Printer

●

Other (Select the appropriate brand name.)

23.

Click Add to save the settings. The product name appears in the Printer List.

Figure 6-6

Printer List screen

324 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

24.

Click the product name to open the Select Printer screen and verify that the product has been installed.

ENWW

Figure 6-7

Select Printer screen

Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3

In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility.

Click Add Printer (in Mac OS X V10.1), or click Add (Mac OS X V10.2), or click Printers and then click Add Printer (Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later).

When the New Printer drivers detected pop-up box appears, click OK.

From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for the product.

Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for the product. For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select the product zone; or if you are using IP

Printing, type a TCP/IP address in the Printer Address field. In the Printer Model drop-down menu, select HP. In the Model Name drop-down menu, select HP Color LaserJet 3800.

NOTE

If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file that you want to add.

Click Add. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer appears in the Printer List.

To configure installable options in Mac OS X V10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays, click Show Info? and select Installable Options in the drop-down menu.

NOTE

This step is necessary only for network connections and USB connections that use

Rendezvous/Bonjour. AppleTalk automatically configures the installable options.

Configure the options, click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog box.

Installing the Macintosh printing system 325

Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x

Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.

Click Printer (LPR), and then click OK.

Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area.

Click the appropriate TCP/IP address and queue, and then click OK.

Click Change and scroll through the list of products.

Click the correct product, and then click Select.

Click Create.

326 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system

To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash.

ENWW Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system 327

In-box disk layout

The Macintosh printing-system software consists of the following folders: the HP LaserJet Installer-

Integrated installer program for Mac OS X and for Mac OS 9, and a PDF folder for manuals. The folders are named as follows:

●

Mac OS X

( the HP LaserJet Installer)

●

Mac OS 9 (the integrated installer program for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later and for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2)

●

PDF (manuals)

328 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Mac OS X Classic installation

This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS X

Classic.

Main Install dialog-box sequence

This section provides information about the installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option) in Macintosh operating environments.

A Custom Installation is not available in Mac OS 9 for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.

If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.

The hp LaserJet for Macintosh dialog box opens.

Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box.

If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install

Location: to specify a location.

Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.

Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.

The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the installation file-copy process.

The Installation was successful dialog box appears.

If you want to perform additional installations, click Continue in the Installation was successful dialog box to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.

If you want to set up the printer, click Quit on the Installation was successful dialog box.

The Mac OS 9 readme opens. Follow the instructions to continue setting up the printer.

ENWW Mac OS X Classic installation 329

Mac OS X installation

This section provides information about the various installation dialog-box sequences for the Mac OS X operating system.

Main Install dialog box sequence

This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy

Install (the typical installation option).

Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.

If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click the hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.

Figure 6-8

hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon

The hp LaserJet Software dialog box opens.

Figure 6-9

hp LaserJet Software screen

In the hp LaserJet Software pane, double-click the Mac OS X folder to open it.

In the Mac OS X folder, double-click the HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon. This begins the install process.

330 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

Figure 6-10

HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon

If you are installing the product on Mac OS X V10.1 or later, the Authenticate dialog box appears.

Figure 6-11

Authenticate dialog box

Type the correct “admin” password and click OK to continue. The installer startup screen appears.

Click Cancel to exit the installation.

ENWW

Figure 6-12

HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box

Click Continue. The License dialog box appears.

Mac OS X installation 331

Figure 6-13

License dialog box

Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the license agreement.

Click Save As… to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk.

Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer.

Read the software-license agreement and then click Accept to continue the installation. The Easy

Install dialog box appears.

Figure 6-14

Easy Install dialog box

332 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

The default option in the drop-down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install. You can also select

Custom Install in the same menu.

Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk

Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.

Figure 6-15

HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)

Click Select All to install all of the options that are available on the printing-system software CD, or use the check boxes on the list to install the components that you want to install.

Click the I icon to the right of each item in the list to open a pop-up screen that describes the component.

Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The files are installed in the Library folder on the Macintosh CD.

Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.

ENWW

Figure 6-16

Installing dialog box

The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation.

Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.

When installation is complete, the LASERJET README.RTF file opens and the LaserJet

ReadMe.rtf icon appears on the desktop. Follow these instructions to set up a printer queue for your

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

Mac OS X installation 333

Figure 6-17

LaserJet ReadMe icon

A pop-up message stating that the installation was successful also appears.

Figure 6-18

Installation success message

Click Quit to exit the installer.

Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.

334 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW

7 Engineering Details

Introduction

This chapter presents engineering detail for the following topics:

●

File to E-mail utility

●

HP Easy Printer Care

●

Media attributes

●

Remote firmware update

●

Printing print-ready documents

●

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems

ENWW Introduction 335

File to E-mail utility

The File to E-mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class (MFC) program that reads an .INI

file to detect where the HP LaserJet product software is installed. The program then attaches relevant log or history files to an e-mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist troubleshooting. The utility runs on the computer, but does not interact with your HP LaserJet product.

The tool is included on the installer CD, but is not copied to the computer during the software installation.

HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you through e-mail or by posting it to an HP web page.

The tool is compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.

The File to E-mail utility runs with any MAPI-compliant e-mail programs. It does not run with Web-based e-mail services such as Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL.

Depending on the speed of the computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log files and attach them to an e-mail message.

The File to E-mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 software

CD:

● <CD-ROM drive>util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.exe

●

<CD-ROM drive>util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.ini

To use the File to E-mail utility, copy these files to the desktop, navigate to them in Explorer, and then double-click FileToEmail.exe to open the utility. The utility generates files, opens an e-mail message, and attaches the files so that you can send them to an IT administrator, as shown in the following figure.

NOTE

The figure is provided as an example only. The actual files attached will vary, depending on your product.

336 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Figure 7-1

File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached

If the File to E-mail utility fails for any reason (for instance, if you cancel the new message), all the files are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC, possibly with strings of 0's attached to the end. You can zip these files and e-mail them separately.

File to E-mail utility 337

HP Easy Printer Care

This section contains information about the following topics:

●

Availability

●

Uninstall options

●

HP Software Update

Availability

Uninstall options

After a printing-system installation, click the uninstall icon in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 program group to select and remove any or all of the HP printing-system components. Follow these instructions to remove the HP Easy Printer Care and HP Device Communications Services in a Windows XP operating environment.

NOTE

To uninstall the HP Easy Printer Care software only, use the Windows Add/Remove

Programs feature.

Click Start.

Select Hewlett-Packard.

Select HP Easy Printer Care.

Click Uninstall and follow the onscreen instructions.

Whether you uninstall HP Easy Printer Care from the Program menu or by using the Windows Add/

Remove feature, the installer informs you if HP Easy Printer Care is still managing any products. At this point, the following options are available:

●

Cancel

●

Uninstall

●

Continue

If you select Continue, then HP Easy Printer Care is uninstalled. The installer then checks to see if the

Printer Usage Reports plug-in (PUR) is present and removes it. The uninstall process then removes

HP Device Communications Services, if HP Device Communications Services is not supporting programs or products other than HP Easy Printer Care. If HP Device Communications Services is supporting other applications, then its Add/Remove Program entries appear in the Add/Remove

Program list. HP Software Update is not uninstalled.

HP Software Update

HP Software Update, a utility which can check the HP Web site for updates to your HP software, is installed together with HP Easy Printer Care if the system has an older version or does not carry it.

To uninstall HP Software Update, use the Windows Add/Remove Programs feature.

338 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Media attributes

This section includes the following information about media attributes:

●

Media sources and destinations

●

Media-source commands

●

Driver-supported media sizes

●

Driver-supported media types

●

Custom paper sizes

●

Media-type commands

Media sources and destinations

The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

Table 7-1

HP Color LaserJet 3800 media sources and destinations

Media sources

Media destinations

100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1)

250-sheet paper tray (tray 2)

500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)

Standard 250-sheet top bin

Standard

Optional; standard on the HP Color

LaserJet 3800dtn printer model

Standard

Media-source commands

The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource

or ubyte_array "string"

MediaSource

. See the following table for values of #. For example, " ubyte 4 MediaSource

" is the command for tray 2.

The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is

Esc&l#H

(the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example,

Esc&l1H

is the command fortray 2.

Table 7-2

Media-source commands

Media source

Manual feed in tray 1

Tray 1 (100-sheet)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

PCL 6 PCL 5 ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array

"string"

MediaSource

Esc&l#H

PostScript

/MediaPosition # /

ManualFeed true | false

or null

3 true

3 false

0 false

ENWW Media attributes 339

Table 7-2

Media-source commands (continued)

Media source PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array

"string"

MediaSource

Esc&l#H /MediaPosition # /

ManualFeed true | false

or null

Tray 3 (500-sheet)

Automatically Select (HP unidrivers)

1 false

Automatically Select (HP traditional PCL drivers) or

Printer Auto Select (HP unidrivers)

7 1 null false

For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"

MediaSource

is the PCL 6 command for tray 2.

Driver-supported media sizes

The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the product and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.

Table 7-3

Supported media sizes and attributes

Paper sizes

Letter

PCL 6

"LETTER"

Statement

16K

8.5 x 13

B5 (JIS)

Double Postscard (JIS)

Double Japan Postscard

Rotated

Width

216 mm

(8.5 inches)

215.9 mm

(8.5 inches)

197 mm

(7.75 inches)

216 mm

(8.5 inches)

210 mm

(8.27 inches)

148 mm

(5.83 inches)

182 mm

(7.17 inches)

100 mm

(3.94 inches)

148 mm

Height

279 mm

(11.0 inches)

139.7 mm

(5.5 inches)

273 mm

(10.75 inches)

330 mm

(13 inches)

297 mm

(11.69 inches)

210 mm

(8.27 inches)

257 mm

(10.12 inches)

200 mm

(7.87 inches)

200 mm

(7.87 inches)

"STATEMENT"

"ROC16K"

"8.5x13"

"A4"

"A5"

"JIS B5"

"JPOSTD"

“Double Postcard (JIS)”

340 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Table 7-3

Supported media sizes and attributes (continued)

Paper sizes 1

Width Height

PCL 6 2

Envelope #10

Envelope B5

Envelope C5

Envelope DL

Envelope Monarch

(5.83 inches)

105 mm

(4.13 inches)

176 mm

(6.93 inches)

162 mm

(6.38 inches)

110 mm

(4.33 inches)

99 mm

241 mm

(9.5 inches)

250 mm

(9.84 inches)

229 mm

(9.02 inches)

220 mm

(8.66 inches)

190 mm

"COM10"

"B5 ENV"

"C5"

"DL"

"MONARCH"

Executive

Executive (JIS)

Legal

Custom

(3.88 inches)

185 mm

(7.25 inches)

216 mm

(8.5 inches)

216 mm

(8.5 inches)

Minimum:

127 mm

(5.0 inches)

(7.5 inches)

266 mm

(10.5 inches)

330 mm

(12.99 inches)

355 mm

(14.0 inches)

Minimum:

76.2 mm

(3.0 inches)

"EXEC"

"JISEXEC"

"LEGAL"

Maximum:

215.9 mm

Maximum:

355.6 mm

(8.5 inches) (14.0 inches)

For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.

The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."

For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0 9.0

CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits."

Driver-supported media types

The following table shows the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print-drivers support.

Table 7-4

Supported input media types

Media types

(command string)

Unspecified

Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin

Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500sheet)

Y Y Y

Duplexing unit

Manual duplexing

Media attributes 341

Table 7-4

Supported input media types (continued)

Media types

(command string)

Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin

Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500sheet)

Duplexing unit Manual duplexing

Plain

Preprinted

Letterhead

Transparency

Prepunched

Labels

Bond

Recycled

Color

Light (60–75 g/m 2 , or

16.4–20.5 lb)

Intermediate (90–

104 g/m 2 , or 24.7–

28.5 lb)

Y Y

Heavy (105–120 g/m

, or 28.8–32.9 lb)

Extra Heavy (120–163 g/m 2 , or 32.9–44.7 lb)

Cardstock (164–220 g/ m 2 , or 45–60.3 lb)

Rough (90–105 g/m 2 , or 24.7–28.8 lb)

Glossy

(75–120 g/m 2 , or 20.5–32.9 lb)

Tough Paper

1 (Glossy

Film)

Y Y Y N Y

Envelope Y N N N N

Use only HP LaserJet glossy media. Using HP Inkjet glossy media can cause permanent damage to the printer.

Custom paper sizes

The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.

Table 7-5

PCL 6 custom media sizes

Tray

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

Dimensions

Width

Height

Width

Minimum

76.2 mm (3.0 inches)

127.0 mm (5.0 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

Maximum

215 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

342 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Table 7-5

PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued)

Tray Dimensions

Height

Tray 3 (500-sheet)

Duplexing unit

Width

Height

Width

Height

Minimum

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

148.0 mm (5.83 inches)

210.0 mm (8.26 inches)

Maximum

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

355.6 mm (14.0 inches)

Media-type commands

The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6.

Table 7-6

Media-type commands

Esc& n# Wd Paper type

Esc&

Plain

Preprinted

Letterhead

Transparency

Prepunched

Labels

Bond

Recycled

Color

Light

Intermediate

Heavy

Extra Heavy

Cardstock

Rough

Esc&

Glossy

Tough Paper

Esc& 9 Wd Envelope

You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.

The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an uppercase "S".

Media attributes 343

Remote firmware update

The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing-system software and print drivers.

The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:

Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the product.

Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to the computer.

Download the new firmware to the product.

Determining the current level of firmware

To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.

Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.

Press and to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press .

Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.

Press to print the configuration page.

Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20051002 07.000.0.

Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site

The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a selfextracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to the following

URL: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware

The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file.

NOTE

For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file.

Downloading the new firmware to the product

For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/support/ clj3800 .

The product can receive an RFU update to a product when the product is in a READY state. The product waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.

NOTE

If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web-access alerts.

344 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed.

Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed.

Use one of the methods described in this manual to update the printer firmware.

Printer messages during the firmware update

The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.

Table 7-7

Troubleshooting a firmware update

Cause Result

The job was cancelled from the control panel.

No update has occurred.

A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example, the parallel cable was removed).

No update has occurred.

A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE process.

A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING

UPGRADE process.

A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process.

No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel port.

The update has been completed.

Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.

All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote firmware update fails in a Windows OS, the .RFU file must be resent. For more information, see

Table

7-9 Update messages .

If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh OS, contact support from an HP Customer Care Center.

The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation.

Table 7-8

Troubleshooting a firmware update failure

Reason for firmware update failure

The .RFU file is corrupted.

The wrong product is contained in the .RFU file.

Corrective action

The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware .

The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/ clj3800_firmware .

Remote firmware update 345

Table 7-8

Troubleshooting a firmware update failure (continued)

Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action

The upgrade was interrupted.

A flash hardware failure occurred.

See

Table 7-9 Update messages

Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the product for a local telephone support list).

Three messages appear during a normal update process; a fourth (RESEND UPGRADE) appears only if the update process does not succeed.

Table 7-9

Update messages

Printer message

RECEIVING UPGRADE

PERFORMING UPGRADE

INITIALIZING

RESEND UPGRADE

RFU LOAD ERROR

SEND RFU UPGRADE

ON PARALLEL PORT

Explanation

This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of an .RFU update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of the .RFU update.

NOTE

If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No message appears on the product control panel to indicate that the update was interrupted.

This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware.

NOTE

If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while

PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display.

This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the

DIMM until the product reinitializes.

This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the

RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another update by any means that is supported by the printer, regardless of the connection

(network, parallel, or USB).

This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the print-engine firmware is corrupted.

If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the product.

NOTE

To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.

Downloading custom color profiles

Obtain custom color profiles just as you would any other remote-firmware update, using the procedures described in these sections.

Custom color-profile .RFU files are named as follows:

346 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW clj####_<what>_<version>.RFU

where:

●

#### is the printer-model number of the color table

●

<what> is a one-word description of what the table does

●

<version> is a two-part version number consisting of a major and a minor value

The custom color-profile .RFU tiles that are available include:

●

A simulation of the color settings for the HP LaserJet 4650 printer:

*clj4650_*.RFU

●

A simulation of the color settings for the HP LaserJet 9500 printer:

*clj9500_*.RFU

●

A remote-firmware-update file that resets your printer to its original state:

*reset_*.RFU

While every care is taken to ensure a close match with the colors available on the product, several factors can affect the outcome of the match:

●

Differences between printers within and between a given model line

●

Media type

● The age and state of the custom-profile printer and the product to which the profile is to be downloaded

●

The use or non-use of genuine HP supplies

● Environmental conditions

Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser

Complete the following steps to update the printer firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through a browser.

NOTE

The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second

page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware

Open a browser window.

In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>

, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/

IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type

FTP://

192.168.0.90

Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.

Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window.

Remote firmware update 347

NOTE

If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view.

Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.

Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.

Click OK to save the setting.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until you see this message.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection

If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update the firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.

Windows operating systems

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

NOTE

Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Powersave mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.

Open a command window on the computer.

Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>

. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type

ftp 192.168.0.90

Press Enter on the keyboard.

When prompted for the user name, press Enter .

When prompted for the password, press Enter .

Type bin

at the command prompt.

Press Enter . The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.

348 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Type put <FILENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\3800FW.RFU

, and then press

Enter .

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type the following path: put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3800fw.rfu"

The following series of messages appears in the command window:

200 PORT command successful

150 Opening BINARY mode data connection

226 Ready

226 Processing Job

226 Transfer complete

After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.

10.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

control panel.

NOTE

11.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

12.

At the command prompt, type bye

to exit the FTP command.

13.

At the command prompt, type exit

to return to the Windows interface.

Macintosh operating systems

Make a note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second

page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware .

Open a Terminal window on the computer. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.

Type

FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>

For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type

FTP 192.168.0.90

Press Enter on the keyboard.

When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter .

Remote firmware update 349

Type put <path>

, where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the

Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/3800fw.rfu

, and then press Enter .

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3800FW.RFU".

To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put

command, type put

and a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put

command.

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update through a local Windows port

If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the product by using a

COPY

command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.

Windows 98 or Windows Me

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:

Mode lpt1:,,p

NOTE

If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:

> LPT1 Not Rerouted

> Resident portion of MODE loaded

> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out

At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate product port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu lpt1

350 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu" lpt1

Press Enter on the keyboard.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Type exit

at the command prompt to close the command window.

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003

The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.

Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer drivers, but it is possible to update the printer firmware in Windows NT 4.0.

At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu lpt1

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu" lpt1

Press Enter on the keyboard.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

At the command prompt, type exit

to close the command window.

Remote firmware update 351

Remote firmware update through a USB port

If the product is connected over a USB connection, follow these instructions:

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME>\

\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following: copy /b 3800fw.rfu\\your_computer\clj3800

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu"

\\your_computer\clj3800

Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the

computer screen.

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update through a Windows network

If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions:

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \

\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>

C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu"

\\your_server\your_computer

Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the

computer screen.

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

352 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update for UNIX systems

For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the product is acceptable, including the following:

At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>

, where

</home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .TAR file.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility

Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the

HP Printer Utility and the 3800FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product. The HP Printer

Utility is a software program that is available only for Mac OS X V10.2 or later.

The HP Printer Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP Printer Utility by downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software .

The firmware file (3800FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware

See

Downloading the new firmware to the product for more information.

After you have the firmware file and the HP Printer Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.

Complete the following steps:

Open the HP Printer Utility.

Select Update Firmware, click Choose, browse to firmware upgrade file, and then click Open.

On the Update Firmware screen, click Update.

Remote firmware update 353

NOTE

You might receive an error message on the screen indicating that the printer is offline. Verify that the printer is turned on. If it is, ignore the message. The Updating screen appears and the update proceeds as expected.

The update process can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with

the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel.

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility

(Mac OS 9.x only)

Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the

HP LaserJet Utility and the 3800FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product.

The firmware file (3800FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware

See

Downloading the new firmware to the product

for more information.

After you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.

Complete the following steps:

Open the HP LaserJet Utility.

Click Select Printer, select the product that you want to update on the network, and then click

OK. An information dialog box for the printer appears.

On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can select a file to be downloaded to the product.

Click Select File.

Locate the 3800FW.RFU file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Click

Select. The Files dialog boxes are updated to show the 3800FW.RFU file under File to download.

Click Download.

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

354 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Remote firmware update by using the LPR command

NOTE

This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,

Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.

Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.

From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l

-OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>

, where <IPADDRESS> can be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of the .RFU file.

NOTE

The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The

messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

Type exit

at the command prompt to close the command window.

Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin

This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on the computer. Complete the following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.

Start HP Web Jetadmin.

Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and then click Go. The product Status window opens.

Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder.

Remote firmware update 355

Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product that you want to update in the list of products, and click to select it.

Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update

Printer Firmware from the choose action list.

If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.

Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.

Refresh the browser.

Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.

10.

Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product.

11.

Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the

control panel.

NOTE

12.

Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update.

HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.

Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.

Start HP Web Jetadmin.

Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps: a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.

-or-

b. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.

-or-

c. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.

To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.

The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if necessary to view it.

In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information.

Click Return to Device Group when finished.

356 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Printing print-ready documents

Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer without first opening the original software program:

●

HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)

●

Portable Document Format (.PDF)

●

Postscript (.PS)

●

Text (.TXT)

Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.

NOTE

The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However, any print-ready file type can be substituted.

Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser

Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser.

NOTE

The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

Determining the current level of firmware .

Open a browser window.

In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>

. For example, if the TCP/IP address of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following:

FTP:// 192.168.0.90

Locate the print-ready file for the product.

Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.

NOTE

Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.

Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.

Click OK to save the setting.

Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection

If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:

ENWW Printing print-ready documents 357

Windows operating systems

Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the Configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

Open a command window on the computer.

Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>

. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following: ftp 192.168.0.90

Press Enter on the keyboard.

When prompted for the user name, press Enter .

When prompted for the password, press Enter .

Type bin

at the command prompt.

Press Enter . The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.

Type put <FILENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed, including the path. For example, type the following: put C:\LJ\3800FW.PDF

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3800FW.PDF"

The following series of messages appears in the command window:

200 PORT command successful

150 Opening BINARY mode data connection

226 Ready

226 Processing Job

10.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

11.

The print-ready file prints.

12.

At the command prompt, type bye

to exit the FTP command.

13.

At the command prompt, type exit

to return to the Windows interface.

358 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Macintosh operating systems

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the following folder:

System/Applications/Utilities/Terminal

Type

FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>

. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following:

FTP 192.168.0.90

Press Enter on the keyboard.

When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter .

You can drag and drop the firmware file into the Terminal folder (System/Applications/Utilities/

Terminal). Alternatively, you can type put <path>

, where <path> is the location where the printready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type the following: put /username/desktop/3800FW.PDF

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3800FW.PDF"

To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put

command, type put

and a space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put

command.

Press Enter .

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer.

The product automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.

Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port

To print directly by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section for your operating system.

Printing print-ready documents 359

Windows 98 or Windows Me

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:

Mode lpt1:,,p

NOTE

If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode

command.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:

> LPT1 Not Rerouted

> Resident portion of MODE loaded

> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out

At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\>

command prompt, type the following: copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF lpt1

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800FW.PDF"

Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints.

At the command prompt, type exit

to close the command window.

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003

The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy

command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.

At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF lpt1

Press Enter on the keyboard.

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents

\3800FW.PDF"

. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints.

At the command prompt, type exit

to close the command window.

360 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

ENWW

Print-ready file printing in a Windows network

If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \

\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>

, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file

(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:

C:\>copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename

NOTE

If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type

C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800FW.PDF"

\\your_server\sharename

Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.

Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems

For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable, including the following:

At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>

, where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.

Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command

NOTE

This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.

Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see

HP traditional print drivers for Windows . For more information about the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and

From a command window, type the following: lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps

<FILENAME> where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where

FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.

NOTE

The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.

The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window.

Type exit

at the command prompt to close the command window.

Printing print-ready documents 361

Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems

The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for operating system that supports the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The printing-system drivers for Windows 98 and Windows Me are the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and PS Emulation

Driver. The printing-system drivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are the new HP unidrivers, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the HP PCL 6 Unidriver,

HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.

For more information about the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers, see

PS emulation unidrivers, see

HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows .

NOTE

HP Color LaserJet 3800 print driver features are supported in Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit) and Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit ) operating systems.

HP Color LaserJet 3800 print driver features are supported in Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X

Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, except as otherwise noted.

Job-stream output

Table 7-10

Driver support for the job-stream output feature

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

PCL 5 support

PCL 6 support

PCL 6 pass-through support

PCL 6 XL Color

Postscript 3

Postscript 1, 2 x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL6 PCL 5 x

PS Emulation

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

PCL 6 raster compression

Table 7-11

PCL 6 color raster compression support

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

PCL 6 color raster compression x

HP unidriver

PCL6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Macintosh

Postscript

362 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

PJL/PJL Encoding

Table 7-12

Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

PJL support

UTF-8 encoding for PJL

(Unicode to 8-bit) x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Job tracking

Table 7-13

Driver support for job tracking

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

.PRN file driver identification

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

Job accounting information

Job accounting enhancements

(UUID)

Job accounting enhancements

(color) x

Reliable Time Services – born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x Job Timestamp – born on date

(PJL TIMESTAMP)

Born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x Sending user name with every job

Driver hooks for job ticket consumption x

Driver hooks for event extensions for UI control data x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

x x (Mac OS X only)

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 363

Connectivity/Printing

Table 7-14

Driver support for connectivity features

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Parallel (direct connect)

Network – TCP/IP (wired)

Network – TCP/IP (wireless

USB (Direct Connect) through

7.1.2 Port Monitor (MS USB

Print) (bidirectional)

USB (Direct Connect) through

1284.4 Port Monitor (HP DOT4 /

7.1.3 ) (bidirectional) x

USB (Direct Connect) through

1284.4 Port Monitor (MS DOT4 /

7.1.3) (bidirectional) –

Windows XP only x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

USB (Direct Connect) through

7.1.2 (Apple USB Print)

(bidirectional)

USB (Direct Connect) through

1284.4 (HP Hose DOT4 / 7.1.3 )

(bidirectional)

USB (Direct Connect) through

1284.4 (HP CIA DOT4 / 7.1.3 )

(bidirectional)

Rendezvous

Windows 98, Me

x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

x x x x (Mac OS 9 only) x (Mac OS X only) x only)

Bidirectional communication

Table 7-15

Driver support for the bidirectional communication features

Windows 98, Me Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Autoconfiguration through EAC x

Autoconfiguration through direct connect – parallel - LPT - DOT4 stack x

Network – TCP/IP x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

364 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Table 7-15

Driver support for the bidirectional communication features (continued)

Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Windows 98, Me Macintosh

Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh

Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript

Automatic Configuration (other than EAC) x

Autoconfiguration through EAC over USB (DOT4)

Update Now x x x x x x x x x x

Language Monitor

x x

MasterMon is a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with bidirectional communication products. It inserts PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports.

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Table 7-16

Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Feature lockout

Continuous export x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Bundle support

Table 7-17

Bundle support

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Printer bundle in driver UI

Bundle support thorugh installer x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

PS Emulation

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 365

Tray and paper assignment

Table 7-18

Tray and paper assignment

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Assign paper size to tray

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

Windows 98 and Windows Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Macintosh

Postscript

Installable options

Table 7-19

Driver support for installable options

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Duplexing unit

Manual duplex enable

Printer hard disk x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x

Total memory x x x

DWS (available memory)

Additional source trays

Font DIMM/compact flash support

Font DIMM Installer

Mopier enabled

Job-storage feature enabled

Postscript passthrough x x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

366 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Printer services

Table 7-20

Printer services (Services tab)

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Internet Services Links/Launch product support Web site

Launch HP EWS features through TCP/IP port x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Macintosh

Postscript

x x

UI features

Table 7-21

Driver support for UI features

Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

UI tabs ("Panels" in Macintosh) x

UI extensions x x Page preview images

Printer image bitmaps with hot spots

Paper size dimensions

Device settings notification

About … x

Accessibility/Disability (JAWS)

Accessibility architecture x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

x (Mac OS X only) x x x x x x x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)

Help features

Table 7-22

Driver support for Help features

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

What's this? Help (F1)

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 367

Table 7-22

Driver support for Help features (continued)

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Help button

Bubble Help

MS Windows "?" Help

Constraint Help x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6

PCL 5

x x x x x

PS Emulation

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6

x x x x

PCL 5

x x x x

PS Emulation

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Print Task Quick Sets

Table 7-23

Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Print Task Quick Sets

User Defined Quick Sets x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Media sizes

Table 7-24

Driver support for media sizes

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Media Size selection

User-defined custom media

Custom media-size dialog through driver UI x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

368 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Media types

Table 7-25

Driver support for media types

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Media types appear in one list

User Defined Media Types

Combined Media Types &

Sources in program. (Always

ON, NO driver UI switch)

Combined Media Types and sources in program (optional, driver UI switch)

Combined Media Types and sources in program (in driver UI)

Alternative Letterhead mode x x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

x x x x

Job storage

Table 7-26

Driver support for the job-storage features

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Proof and hold

Private job

Quick Copy

Stored Job

Job name

User name

PIN to print (for private jobs)

PIN to print (for stored jobs)

Job-storage pop-up

Automatic job and user name

Job-storage override x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 369

Print quality and resolution

Table 7-27

Print-quality and resolution features

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Print-quality options

Windows XP,Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

Print-quality – custom options recall

Print optimizations

Rendering mode (automatic)

Send graphics as vector

Send graphics as raster x x

Send page as raster

Color REt

Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)

Image Mode x

HP Digital Photograph x

PCL 5 Immediate Graphics

Mode

Activated through the Edge Control option x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Reordering Options

Table 7-28

Driver support for the reordering options

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Page order (based on output bin) x

Page order (reordering for job) x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

x x

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Macintosh

Postscript

x (Mac OS X only) x (Mac OS X only)

370 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Resizing options

Table 7-29

Resizing options

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Print Document On

Scale to Fit

Allow Scaling from Large Paper x

% of Normal Size x

Rotate by 180 degrees x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Color settings

Table 7-30

Color settings

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Color Options x

Manual/automatic color options x

CMYK inks

Print in Grayscale

Color/monochrome switching

ICM Method x x x x x

ICM Intent

Print in Grayscale blocked

(HP PCL 6 Unidriver [Black] only) sRGB (ColorSmart for legacy

HP LaserJet printers)

CMYK color management x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x

Mac

x x x x

Mac

Postscript

x x

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 371

Watermarks

Table 7-31

Driver support for watermarks feature

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Windows 98, Me

Driver type

Driver

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

Watermarks on/off

First page only

Custom watermark definition

Watermark angle

Watermark font name

Watermark font color x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Watermark font shading

Watermark font size x x x x x x

Watermark font style x x x x

Locally defined watermarks x x x

Mac OS 9 (Mac OS X Classic) only; not supported by Mac OS X or later.

x x x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh 11

x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Alternative source/paper type

Table 7-32

Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

All pages the same x

Use different paper (UI control) x

Front Cover (Blank Front Cover

Inserted)

First Page x

Other pages

Last Page x

Back Cover – Blank Back Cover

Inserted x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

372 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Printing destination

Table 7-33

Driver support for the printing-destination feature

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

Paper Destinations

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x

PS Emulation

Windows 98, Me

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Finishing options and duplexing

Table 7-34

Duplexing

Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

Driver type

Driver

Auto duplex/print on both sides x

Manual duplex x

Mixed duplex and simplex in single job x

Long Edge/Short Edge (Flip On) x

Pages per sheet (N-up)

Page borders on/off

Page order (N-Up)

Booklet Printing (layout through software)

Booklet Target Size x x x x x

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x x x x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

x x x x x (Mac OS X only)

Font support

Table 7-36

Font support

Operating system

Driver type

Driver

General device font support

Font substitution

Font DIMM (on/off)

Send TrueType as Bitmap

TrueType Fonts (UI option)

Print Text as Black x x x

Windows XP, Windows 2000,

Windows Server 2003

HP unidriver

PCL 6 PCL 5

x x x

PS Emulation

x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

x x x

HP traditional driver

PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation

x x x x x x x x

Macintosh

x x

Macintosh

Postscript

Postscript-specific features

Table 7-37

Driver support for postscript-specific features

Operating system

Driver

Postscript memory

Output protocol

Send CTRL-D before each job

Send CTRL-D after each job

Windows XP

HP unidriver

x x x x

PS Emulation

Unidriver

Windows 98, Me

x x x x

PS Emulation

Driver

Macintosh

Postscript

374 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Table 7-37

Driver support for postscript-specific features (continued)

Operating system Windows XP

Driver

Convert gray text to postscript gray

Convert gray graphics to postscript gray

Add euro currency symbol

Job timeout

Wait timeout

Minimum font size to download as outline

Minimum font size to download as bitmap

Printing Preferences

CMYK Inks

Postscript Language Level

Send postscript error handler

Fit to Page

Output options

Optimize for speed

Optimize for portability

Encapsulated postscript (EPS)

Archive format

Fit to Page

TrueType font download option

Automatic

Outline

Bitmap

Native TrueType x x x x x x x x x x x x

HP unidriver

x x x x x x x

PS Emulation

Unidriver

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Windows 98, Me

PS Emulation

Driver

Macintosh

Postscript

ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 375

376 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW

Index

Symbols/Numerics

% of Normal Size setting

PCL traditional drivers 118

unidrivers 227

About button

PCL traditional drivers 148

About tab, unidrivers 266

accessibility

documentation 19

drivers 367

accessories, automatic

configuration 31

ADA (Americans with Disabilities

Act) compliance 19

Add Printer installation 297

Additional Drivers dialog box,

Windows 294

Additional Software dialog box,

Customization Wizard 306

Additional Software dialog box,

Windows 290

Adobe Acrobat Reader

installing 26

printing PDF files without 357

viewing documentation 18

Adobe RGB

Advanced tab, unidrivers 201

unidrivers 252

Adobe Web site 166

Advanced Printing Features setting,

unidrivers 203, 204

alerts, e-mail

HP Embedded Web Server

65, 66

Macintosh 86

Allow Scaling from Large Paper,

PCL traditional drivers 163

Alternative Letterhead Mode

PCL traditional drivers 163

alternative source support 372

Americans with Disabilities Act

(ADA) compliance 19

AppleTalk networks 317

application settings

traditional drivers 95

unidrivers 195

ASCII output protocol, PS

PCL traditional drivers 164

autoconfiguration, driver

support for 31

unidrivers 262

autoconfiguration, Enterprise

about 31

Windows support 32

Automatic color settings

PCL traditional drivers 151

unidrivers 249

automatic two-sided printing

autorun CD-ROM, Windows 25

Back button, Windows installation

dialog boxes 275

Back Cover settings

PCL traditional drivers 132,

135

unidrivers 217, 222

Back to Front printing, unidrivers

206

Basic Installation

choosing 25

dialog boxes, Windows 276

Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers

146

bidirectional communication

about 31

driver support 364

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

binary output protocol, PS

PCL traditional drivers 108

binding settings

unidrivers 236

bins

custom paper sizes 129, 214

driver support 366

black, printing all text as

115

PCL traditional drivers 109

booklet printing settings

unidrivers 236

both sides, printing on

PCL traditional driver settings

PCL traditional drivers 160,

Bubble help 100

bundle support 365

Cancel button, Windows installation

dialog boxes 275

cardstock, paper type commands

343

CD-ROM directory structure, Macintosh

directory structure, Windows

ENWW Index 377

documentation 18, 26

installer, Windows printing-

system software 24

installing Macintosh printing-

system software 316

installing Windows printing-

system software 274

languages 12

Change TCP/IP Settings dialog

box, Windows 288

Check Printer Connection dialog

box, Windows 285

CHM files, viewing 19

CMYK settings, PS Emulation

Driver 183

collation settings

PS Emulation Driver 181

unidrivers 202, 264

Color Control, PS Emulation Driver

172

Color Options, PS Emulation Driver

182

color printing

driver support 371

ICC profiles 40

Image Color Management (ICM)

PANTONE color profiles 41

restricting from control panel

restricting from HP Embedded

Web Server 69

restricting from Macintosh 90

settings, controlling 38

Color tab

PCL traditional drivers 150

unidrivers 248

Color Themes

Color Usage log, Macintosh 83

unidrivers 251

command-line printing, Windows

common installer, features 26

command-line silent install for

commands, paper

Configuration Page, HP Embedded

Web Server 62

Configure Device page, HP

Embedded Web Server 65

Configure tab, PCL traditional

drivers 157

Confirm Changing Setting dialog

box, Windows 284

Confirm Network Settings dialog

box, Windows 283

connectivity bidirectional communication

support 31

driver support 364

features 6

Printer Connection dialog box,

Windows 278

Searching dialog box, Windows

279

constraint messages

context-sensitive help

PS Emulation Driver 166

PCL traditional drivers 147

continuous export 36

control panel settings

traditional drivers 95

unidrivers 195

Copy Count settings

PCL traditional drivers 132

unidrivers 202, 264

covers, use different paper settings

unidrivers 217

Ctrl-D settings 193, 261

Custom Installation

choosing 25

dialog boxes, Windows 276

Custom Installer Location dialog box, Windows

Customization Wizard 307

custom paper sizes

PCL traditional drivers 126,

342

PCL unidrivers 213, 342

customer support 61

Customization Wizard

dialog boxes 298

default Print Task Quick Sets

PCL traditional drivers 102

unidrivers 208

default printer, setting 312

deleting job-storage jobs 145

destinations, paper 339

Device Information page, HP

Embedded Web Server 60, 65

Device Installer Customization

Wizard

dialog boxes 298

Device Options tab, PS Emulation

Driver 176

Device Settings tab, unidrivers

256

Device Status page, HP Embedded

Web Server 61

diagnostics 37, 254

dialog boxes, printing-system software installation

Mac OS X 330

Mac OS X Classic 329

Windows 276

Windows Customization Wizard

298

Digital Imaging Options, unidrivers

LPR 361 networks, Windows 361

DIMMs, fonts

PCL traditional driver settings

162

unidriver settings 258

direct printing

FTP, Windows 357

local port, Windows 359

UNIX 361

direct-connect installation 276

directory structure, software CD-

ROM

Macintosh 12

Windows 11

disabling

driver features 35

378 Index ENWW

disk. See hard disk disk space requirements

Macintosh and Linux 7

Windows 7

Document Options

PCL traditional drivers 105

unidrivers 203, 233

document preview image

PCL traditional drivers 112,

118, 136, 148, 156

unidrivers 223, 227, 238, 253

documentation

HP Embedded Web Server User

Guide 20

HP Jetdirect Administrator's

Guide 21

install notes 20

PCL traditional drivers 105

Print Task Quick Set for use guide, HP Traditional

Print Task Quick Set for use

guide, unidriver 211

User Guide 19

viewing 18, 26

double-sided printing

PCL traditional driver settings

printing-system software 9

downloading

firmware 344

Driver Work Space (DWS) 163

drivers

accessibility support 367

accessory configuration 31

Add Printer installation 297

availability by operating system

bidirectional communication

continuous export feature 36

diagnostics 37

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 36, 365

installable options support

Linux operating systems 8

lockable features 35, 84

Macintosh 30

network preconfiguration 34

paper source commands 339

PCL 6 color raster compression

PJL encoding 363, 372

Point and Print installation

Postcript-specific features 374

Print Quality options 112

Print Task Quick Sets support

PS Emulation Driver features

165

UNIX operating systems 9

Drivers dialog box, Windows 289

Drivers dialog box, Customization

Wizard 304

duplexing unit

custom paper sizes 129, 214

media supported 341

models including 5

PCL traditional driver settings

106, 159

print modes 107

PS Emulation Driver settings

170, 188

unidriver configuration 263

DWS (Driver Work Space) 163

e-mail alerts

HP Embedded Web Server

65, 66

Macintosh 86

E-mail Server page, HP Embedded

Easy Printer Care

Find Other Printers 44

Maintenance Tools pane 55

My HP Printers screen 49

Printer Usage Report 56

Support tab 53

Troubleshooting Tools pane

uninstallation 338

Update screen 57

Edge Control settings

PCL traditional drivers 152

PS Emulation Driver 183

unidrivers 250

Edit Other Links page, HP

Embedded Web Server 65

Effects tab

PCL traditional drivers 116

unidrivers 225

Embedded Jetdirect page, printing

embedded Web server. See HP

Embedded Web Server

Energy Star compliance 5

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

about 31

Novell NetWare operating

systems supported 33

Windows operating systems

supported 32

envelopes, paper type commands

343

escape sequences

ENWW Index 379

paper source 339

paper type 343

event log 60

EWS. See HP Embedded Web

Server

exporting driver parameters 36

External Fonts settings, PCL

unidrivers 258

features 4

File to E-mail utility 336

File Upload, Macintosh 81

Find Other Printers, HP Easy

Printer Care 44

Finish dialog box, Customization

Wizard 310

Finish dialog box, Windows 295

PCL traditional drivers 101

Finishing tab

unidrivers 232

Firewall Detected dialog box,

Windows 280

firewalls dialog box, Windows

280

firmware

determining current level 344 downloading 344

FTP updates, Windows 348

HP Web Jetadmin updates

355

LPR command updates 355

Macintosh updates 82, 349,

353

messages during update 345 troubleshooting updates 345

UNIX updates 353

updating remotely 344

verifying installation 346

Windows network updates

352

Windows, local port update

350

first page out 4

First Page paper settings

PCL traditional drivers 133

unidrivers 218

Fit to Page settings

PCL Traditional Drivers 117

PCL traditional drivers 108

Flip Pages Up

unidriver settings 236

Font Substitution Table, PS

Emulation Unidriver 257

fonts

DIMM settings, PCL traditional

drivers 162

DIMM settings, unidrivers 258

driver support 374

External, PCL unidrivers 258

features 5

Macintosh 315

PS 3 emulation 165

PS Emulation Driver settings

174

PS Emulation Unidriver 262

Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL

traditional drivers 113, 114

Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL

PCL traditional drivers 132

substitution table, PS Emulation

Driver 174

substitution table, unidrivers

258

TrueType download option

375

unidriver settings 203

Upload Fonts, HP Printer Utility

watermarks 121

Windows 268, 270

Form to Tray Assignment,

unidrivers 257

Front Cover settings

unidrivers 217

FTP

direct printing, Windows 357

Windows firmware updates

348

Full Installation

choosing 25

dialog boxes, Windows 276

Graphic settings

PCL traditional drivers 153

114

unidrivers 203

Graphics tab, PS Emulation Driver

171

grayscale printing

PS Emulation Driver 181

guides. See documentation

Halftone settings

PCL traditional drivers 153

PS Emulation Driver 173, 183

unidrivers 251

hard disk

features 4 models including 4

printer 263

PS Emulation Driver settings

189

unidriver settings 263

heavy paper, paper type commands

343

help

Bubble 100

Macintosh 314

operating systems supported

367

PS Emulation Driver 166

Maintenance Tools pane 55

Help button, Windows installation

dialog boxes 275

HP Device Installer Customization

Wizard

dialog boxes 298

HP Digital Imaging Options,

unidrivers 223

HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check

Tool 37

HP Driver Preconfiguration

driver support 365

operating systems and drivers

supported 36

status, PCL traditional drivers

HP Easy Printer Care

Find Other Printers 44

380 Index ENWW

My HP Printers screen 49

Printer Usage Report 56

Support tab 53

Troubleshooting Tools pane

uninstallation 338

Update screen 57

HP Embedded Web Server

about 59

alerts page 65

AutoSend page 65

Configuration Page 62

Configure Device page 65

Device Information page 60,

Device Status page 61

documentation 20

E-mail Server page 65

HP Printer Utility, accessing

from 93

HP Web Jetadmin 59

Information tab 60

language, setting 65 links 61, 65

Macintosh support 314

HP Instant Support 61

HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

HP Jetdirect page, printing 59

HP LaserJet Utility, Macintosh

firmware updates 354

HP Network Registry Agent

(HPNRA) 31

HP PCL traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers

HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL unidrivers

HP Printer Utility, Macintosh

about 73 accessing 73

Color Usage log 83

Device Information 78

E-mail Alerts 86

Embedded Web Server access

Rendezvous Setting 88

Restrict Color 90

Supplies Management 89

Supplies Status 76

Tray Configuration 84

Update Firmware 82

Upload Fonts 80

HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See

PS Emulation Unidriver

HP Registration dialog box,

Windows 297

HP Software License Agreement

dialog box, Windows 278

HP Toolbox, not supported 23

HP Traditional Postscript 3

Emulation Driver. See PS

Emulation Driver

HP Web Jetadmin

downloading 26, 94

Driver Preconfiguration Plugin

firmware updates 355

HP Embedded Web Server

HPNRA (HP Network Registry

Agent) 31

HPPJL Encoding 179

HTML files, viewing 19

ICC color profiles 40

Ignore Application Collation, PCL

traditional drivers 160, 163

Image Color Management (ICM)

list option in drivers 164

inches, settings 130

Include types in application source

Incompatible Print Settings messages. See constraint messages

Information tab, HP Embedded

Web Server 60

input trays. See trays

install notes 20

Installable Options

PS Emulation Driver 188

PS Emulation Unidriver 262

installation

Add Printer 297

Adobe Acrobat Reader 26

command-line silent 311

Customization Wizard for

Windows 298

dialog boxes, Mac OS X 330

dialog boxes, Mac OS X Classic

329

File to E-mail utility 336

Macintosh printing-system

software 316

Point and Print 311

pre-existing, modifying 276

system requirements for

Macintosh and Linux operating

systems 7

system requirements for

Windows operating systems

Windows printing-system

software 274

Installation Type dialog box,

Windows 288

installers availability by operating system

common, features 26

customizing 298

PCL traditional drivers 143

Windows 24

Installing dialog box, Customization

Wizard 310

Installing dialog box, Windows

294

Instant Support 61

International Color Consortium profiles

viewing 40

IP address, locating 59

Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin

Jetdirect Administrator's Guide

Job Notification Options

ENWW Index 381

Job storage enabling in PCL traditional

drivers 161

Macintosh 85

operating systems supported

369

PCL traditional drivers 138

PS Emulation Driver 179, 189

unidriver settings 240, 263

Job Timeout settings 191, 261

landscape orientation settings

Customization Wizard 299, 300

Language Selection dialog box,

Language Selection dialog box,

Windows 276

languages

CD-ROMs 12

HP Embedded Web Server

Language Selection dialog box,

Windows 276

large paper, allowing scaling 163

Last Page settings

PCL traditional drivers 134

unidrivers 220

Layout Options, unidrivers 206

letterhead, alternative mode

PCL traditional drivers 163

lockable features, drivers 35, 84

license agreement dialog box,

Windows 278

links

HP Embedded Web Server

61, 65

Linux operating systems

driver availability 8

system requirements 7

local port command line printing,

Windows 359

localized CD-ROMs 12

LPR commands

firmware updates 355

printing PDF files 361

Macintosh operating systems availability of software

components 10

Classic support 30

Color Usage log 83

components, software 314

Device Information 78

dialog boxes, Mac OS X Classic printing-system software

installation 329

dialog boxes, Mac OS X printingsystem software installation

330

direct printing 357

directory structure, software CD-

ROM 12

driver versions 30

e-mail alerts 86

File Upload command 81

firmware upgrades 349, 353

fonts supported 315

HP Embedded Web Server

314

HP Printer Utility 73

install notes 314

installers 10

installing printing-system

software 316

locking driver features 84

network settings 87

network setup 316, 326

online help 314

PDEs 314

PPDs 314

Rendezvous Setting 88

Restrict Color 90

setting up products with Mac OS

X 325

stored jobs 85

Supplies Management 89

supplies status 76

supported 8

system requirements 7

tray configuration 84

uninstalling printing-system

software 327

Update Firmware 82

Upload Fonts 80

Maintenance Tools pane, HP Easy

Printer Care 55

Manual color settings

PCL traditional drivers 151

unidrivers 249

manuals. See documentation margins

PCL 6 driver 341

measurement units 130

media. See paper memory

base 4

installation requirements for

Macintosh and Linux operating

systems 7

installation requirements for

Windows operating systems

PCL traditional driver settings

PS Emulation Driver settings

178

PS Emulation Unidriver settings

260

unidriver settings 263

messages, constraint

Microsoft Point and Print installation

millimeters, settings 130

mirror image, PS Emulation Driver

173

model scripts, UNIX 9

models

features 4

PCL traditional driver settings

158

moire effect, handling 113, 115

Mopier settings

PCL traditional drivers 160

PS Emulation Driver 189

unidriver 263

More Configuration Options, PCL

traditional drivers 161

382 Index ENWW

My HP Printers screen, HP Easy

Printer Care 49

negative image, PS Emulation

Driver 173

Networking tab, HP Embedded

Web Server 70

networks bidirectional communication

support 364

color printing, restricting 38

direct printing 361

Embedded Jetdirect page,

printing 59

firewalls 280

firmware updates 352

HP Driver Preconfiguration 34

HP Jetdirect Administrator's

Guide 21

HP Web Jetadmin, downloading

Macintosh settings 87

Macintosh setup 316, 317,

326

Point and Print installation

installation dialog box 288

settings 72

TCP/IP Settings, Windows

Windows printing-system

software installation 274

Neutral Grays settings

PCL traditional drivers 153

PS Emulation Driver 183

unidrivers 251

Next steps dialog box, Windows

295

Novell NetWare operating systems,

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

support 33

number of copies, setting

PCL traditional drivers 147

unidrivers 202, 264

online help. See help operating systems availability of software

components 10

bidirectional communication

support 364

bins supported 366

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

support 32

HP Driver Preconfiguration

support 365

PCL 6 color raster compression

Postscript feature support 374

Services tab support 367

standalone drivers 8 supported 8

Optimizations option, PCL

unidrivers 204

Optional Paper Sources, PCL

traditional drivers 160

ordering supplies 26, 51

orientation settings

PCL traditional drivers 134

Other Pages paper settings

unidrivers 220

output bins. See bins

Output Protocol settings, PS

PCL traditional drivers 111

Output Settings, PCL traditional

drivers 113, 115

Page Order settings

unidrivers 206, 237

page orientation settings

PCL traditional drivers 110

Page Setup tab, PS Emulation

Driver 166

pages per minute 4

Pages per Sheet settings

unidrivers 237

PANTONE color profiles 41

paper

Allow Scaling from Large 163

Alternative Letterhead Mode

163, 205

custom sizes, PCL driver

support 342

custom sizes, PCL traditional

driver settings 126

custom sizes, PCL unidriver

settings 213

driver support 368

Include types in application

source list setting 164

margins 341

Pages per Sheet settings, PCL

traditional drivers 110

Pages per Sheet settings,

unidrivers 237

Print Document On settings,

PCL traditional drivers 117

Print Document On settings,

unidrivers 226

Print on Both Sides settings,

sources and destinations 339

Print on Both Sides, PCL

traditional drivers 106

PS Emulation Driver settings

167

size commands 341

Size is settings, PCL traditional

drivers 125

Size is settings, unidrivers

213

sizes supported 5

source commands 339

Source is settings, PCL

traditional drivers 130

Source is settings, unidrivers

215

type commands 343

Type is: settings, PCL traditional

drivers 131

Type is: settings, unidrivers

216

types and sizes supported

339

types supported 341

ENWW Index 383

Paper Handling Options, PCL

traditional drivers 159

Paper Options

PCL traditional drivers 125

unidrivers 212

Paper tab, PCL traditional drivers

124

Paper/Output settings, unidrivers

202

Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 207

parallel port direct-connect

installation 276

PCL 6 raster compression support

362

PCL documents, printing 60

PCL files, command-line printing

PCL traditional drivers

About button 148

accessing 97

Allow Scaling from Large Paper

Alternative Letterhead Mode

alternative source support

Basics tab 146

bidirectional communication

Configuration Status 149

Configure tab 157

custom paper sizes 342

duplexing unit settings 159

Document Options 105

document preview image

112, 118, 136, 148, 156

Effects tab 116

Finishing tab 101

Fit to Page settings 117

Graphic settings 113, 114

grayscale printing 153

Help system 99

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Ignore Application Collation

Include types in application

source list setting 164

installable options support

Job Storage, enabling 161

Job-storage settings 138

margins 341

Mopier Enabled settings 160

memory settings 163

More Configuration Options

161

operating systems supported

Optional Paper Sources 160

Output Settings 113, 115

Paper Handling Options 159

Paper Options 125

paper size commands 341

paper source commands 339

Paper tab 124

PCL 6 color raster compression

Print Quality group box 112

Print Quality Details settings

112, 113

Print Task Quick Sets 102

Print Task Quick Sets support

Printer Model box 158

product image 136

RGB Color settings 154

Scale to Fit 117

Services tab 367

Update Now button 164

Watermarks settings 119

PCL unidrivers

% of Normal Size 227

About tab 266

accessing 197

Advanced Printing Features

Advanced tab 201

Alternative Letterhead Mode

alternative source support

Automatic Configuration 262

bidirectional communication

Copy Count settings 202

custom paper sizes 342

Document Options 203, 233

Device Settings tab 256

document preview image

External Fonts settings 258

features 195

Font Substitution Table 258

Finishing tab 232

Flip Pages Up 236

Font DIMM Installer 258

Form to Tray Assignment 257

Graphic setting 203

Halftone settings 251

Help system 199

384 Index ENWW

HP Digital Imaging Options

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Image Color Management (ICM)

Installable Options settings

262

installable options support

Job-storage settings 240

Layout Options 206

Mopier settings 263

Neutral Grays 251

operating systems supported

Pages per Sheet 237

Paper Options 212

paper size commands 341

Paper/Output settings 202

Paper/Quality tab 207

PCL 6 color raster compression

Print Optimizations option 204

Print Task Quick Sets 208

Print Task Quick Sets support

Printing Preferences tab 197

Printer Features 205

Properties tab 198

quality settings 370

raster compression 206

reordering options 370

Resizing Options settings 226

Scale to Fit 226

TrueType font settings 203

Watermarks settings 228

command-line printing 357

PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions)

314

PDF files

installing Adobe Acrobat Reader

LPR commands, printing 361

Macintosh, File Upload

command 81

printing using HP Embedded

Web Server 60

viewing 19

Percentage of Normal Size setting

PCL traditional drivers 118

unidrivers 227

PINs, private jobs

PCL traditional drivers 143

unidrivers 244, 245

Point and Print installation,

Windows printing-system

software 311

Port Creation Options dialog box,

Customization Wizard 304

port selection dialog box, Windows

Customization Wizard 301

portrait orientation settings

ports, included 6

PostScript Device settings, PS

postscript documents, printing 60

PostScript Options, unidrivers

204

PostScript Passthrough 264

Postscript printer description (PPD)

files 314

PostScript tab

Advanced button 192 bitmap compression 192

Ctrl-D settings 193 data format 193

error information 191 header 191

language level 192

output format 191

PS Emulation Driver 189

timeout value 191

PPD (postscript printer description)

files 314

pre-existing installation, modifying

276

preconfiguration, driver 34

preview image, document

PCL traditional drivers 112,

118, 136, 148, 156

unidrivers 238, 253

Print All Text as Black

115

PCL traditional drivers 117

Print Document On settings

unidrivers 226

print modes 107

Print on Both Sides

PCL traditional driver settings

PCL traditional drivers 111

Print Optimizations option, PCL

unidrivers 204

Print Page Borders settings

unidrivers 237

Print Quality Details, PCL traditional

drivers 112, 113

Print Task Quick Sets, PCL traditional drivers

about 102 defaults 102

use guide 105

Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers

print-ready files

command-line printing 357 printing by FTP 357

printing by local WIndows port

359

printing by Windows network

361

ENWW Index 385

printing in UNIX systems 361

printing using HP Embedded

Web Server 60

printing with LPR command

361

Printer Connection dialog box, Full

Installation 278

printer control panel settings

traditional drivers 95

unidrivers 195

Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs)

314

Printer Driver Test Page dialog box,

Windows 296

Printer Features, unidrivers 205

Printer Found dialog box, Windows

282, 283

Printer Model

features 4

PCL traditional driver settings

158

Printer Not Found dialog box,

Windows 281

Printer Port dialog box,

Customization Wizard 301

Printer Properties dialog box,

Customization Wizard 308

Printer Properties dialog box,

Windows 292

Printer Settings dialog box,

Windows 286

printer, setting default 312

printing direct in a Windows network

361 direct in UNIX 361

direct using FTP 357

direct using local Windows port

359

direct using LPR command

361

files using HP Embedded Web

Server 60

User Guide 19

Printing Preferences tabs 197

Private job settings

PCL traditional drivers 141

PCL traditional drivers 141

unidrivers 244

PRN files, printing 60

product image 136

product support 61

Proof and Hold job settings

PS Emulation Unidriver 260

unidrivers 243

Properties tabs 198

protocols

configuring 72

Windows installation dialog box

288

PS 3 font emulation 165

PS Emulation Driver

About 170

alternative source support

bidirectional communication

support 364

bins supported 366

bundle support 365

collation settings 181

Color Control 172

Color Options 182

context-sensitive help 166

copies, number of 169

Device Options tab 176

Edge Control 183

features 165, 374

halftone settings 173, 183

grayscale printing 181

Help system 166

HP Driver Preconfiguration

HPPJL Encoding 179

Installable Options 188

installable options support

job-storage settings 179, 189

mirror image, printing 173

memory settings 178

Mopier Mode 189

More Options 170

negative image, printing 173

Neutral Grays 183

operating systems supported

Print Quality group box 112

Print Task Quick Sets support

Printing on Both Sides 170

Printer features group box

178

PS 3 font emulation 165

resolution settings 172

Watermark settings 185

Watermarks settings 184

Window duplexing unit settings

188

PS emulation fonts 270

PS Emulation Unidriver

% of Normal Size 227

About tab 266

accessing 197

Advanced Printing Features

Advanced tab 201

Alternative Letterhead Mode

alternative source support

Automatic Configuration 262

386 Index ENWW

bidirectional communication

Copy Count settings 202

Ctrl-D settings 261

Document Options 203, 233

Device Settings tab 256

document preview image

Font Substitution Table 257

Finishing tab 232

Flip Pages Up 236

Font DIMM Installer 258

font settings 262

Form to Tray Assignment 257

Graphic setting 203

Halftone settings 251

Help system 199

HP Digital Imaging Options

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Image Color Management (ICM)

Installable Options settings

262

installable options support

Job-storage settings 240

Layout Options 206

Output Protocol settings 260

Mopier settings 263

Neutral Grays 251

operating systems supported

Pages per Sheet 237

Paper Options 212

Paper/Output settings 202

Paper/Quality tab 207

PostScript Passthrough 264

PostScript Device settings

260

PostScript Memory settings

260

PostScript Options 204

Print Task Quick Sets 208

Print Task Quick Sets support

Printing Preferences tabs 197

Printer Features 205

Properties tabs 198

quality settings 370

raster compression 206

reordering options 370

Resizing Options settings 226

Scale to Fit 226

timeout settings 261

TrueType font settings 203

Watermarks settings 228

PS files, command-line printing

quality, driver support 370

Quick Copy job settings

PCL traditional drivers 142

PS Emulation Unidriver 206

unidrivers 244

Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick

Sets

raster compression

PCL unidrivers 206

Ready to Create Installer dialog box

307

Ready to Install dialog box,

Windows 292

regional versions, CD-ROMs 12

Registration dialog box, Windows

297

releasing job-storage jobs 144,

187, 247

remote firmware updates

about 344

determining current firmware

level 344 downloading 344

FTP, Windows 348

HP Web Jetadmin 355

LPR commands 355

Macintosh 82, 349, 353

messages 345 troubleshooting 345

UNIX 353

verifying installation 346

Windows network 352

Windows, using local port 350

Rendezvous Setting, Macintosh

reordering options 370

Resizing Options

driver support 371

unidriver settings 226

resolution

driver support 370

PCL traditional driver settings

113, 115

PS Emulation Driver settings

172

Restrict Color screen, HP Printer

Utility 90

Restrict Color, HP Embedded Web

Server 69

RFU. See remote firmware updates

RGB settings

PCL traditional drivers 117

unidrivers 252

RTF files, viewing 19

ENWW Index 387

Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature

113, 115

Scale to Fit setting

unidrivers 226

Scaling control, PS Emulation

Driver 173

screen-readable documentation

Searching dialog box, Windows

279

Security page, HP Embedded Web

Server 65, 68

Send Ctrl-D settings 193, 261

Send TrueType as Bitmaps

114

PCL unidrivers 205

serial number 60

PCL traditional drivers 102

Set Port Name dialog box, Windows

settings

Print Task Quick Sets,

Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers

208

Settings tab, HP Embedded Web

Server 64

silent installation

command-line 311

Customization Wizard 298

sizes, paper

commands 341

custom 342

margins 341

PCL Traditional Driver settings

125

Print on Both Sides settings,

PCL traditional drivers 130

Print on Both sides, PCL

traditional drivers 106

PS Emulation Driver settings

167

supported 339

unidriver settings 213

sleep mode 4

smart duplexing 233

Source is settings

unidrivers 215

sources, paper. See trays

Specify Printer dialog box, Windows

285

speed specifications 4

sRGB settings

Macintosh supplies 76, 89

unidrivers 252

standalone drivers 8

status

devices 61

supplies 60

storage, job enabling in PCL traditional

drivers 161

Macintosh 85

operating systems supported

369

PCL traditional drivers 138

PS Emulation Driver 179, 189

unidriver settings 240, 263

Stored job settings

PCL traditional drivers 142

unidrivers 244

substitution table for fonts, PS

Emulation Driver 174

supplies

AutoSend page, HP Embedded

Web Server 65

features 6

Macintosh status 76, 89

ordering 26, 51

usage AutoSend page 65

viewing status 60

Support tab, HP Easy Printer Care

Support tab, HP Printer Utility 79

support, product 61

system requirements

Macintosh and Linux 7

Windows 7

TBCP output protocol, PS

TCP/IP address, locating 59

Test Page dialog box, Windows

296

text files, command-line printing

text, printing all as black

timeout settings 191, 261

115

unidriver 205

time settings, HP Embedded Web

Server 65

Toolbox, not supported 23

traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers; PS Emulation

Driver transparencies, paper type

commands 343

trays

Alternative Letterhead Mode

163, 205

autoconfiguration 31

custom paper sizes 129, 214

driver support 366

included 6, 339

Installable Options, PS

Emulation Driver 188

Macintosh configuration 84

media supported 5, 341

paper source commands 339

unidriver configuration 263

PCL traditional driver settings

160

PS Emulation Driver settings

169

Source is settings, PCL

traditional drivers 130

Source is settings, unidrivers

215

unidriver Form to Tray

Assignment 257

troubleshooting

File to E-mail utility 336

firmware upgrades 345

HP driver Diagnostic Printer

Check Tool 37

388 Index ENWW

Services tab, unidrivers 254

Troubleshooting Tools pane, HP

Easy Printer Care 58

TrueType font settings

PS Emulation Unidriver 262

Send as Bitmap, PCL traditional

drivers 113, 114

Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers

substitution table, PS Emulation

Driver 174

unidrivers 203

two-sided printing

PCL traditional driver settings

TXT files, command-line printing

PCL traditional drivers 131

Type is settings

unidrivers 216

types, paper

Include in application source list

setting 164

PCL traditional drivers settings

131

Print on Both Sides settings,

Print on Both sides, PCL

traditional drivers 106

supported 341

unidriver settings 216

unattended installation

command-line 311

Customization Wizard 298

unidrivers

% of Normal Size 227

About tab 266

accessing 197

Advanced Printing Features

Advanced tab 201

Alternative Letterhead Mode

alternative source support

Automatic Configuration 262

automatic configuration 33

bidirectional communication

constraint messages 199

Copy Count settings 202

custom paper sizes 342

Document Options 203, 233

Device Settings tab 256

document preview image

Font DIMM Installer 258 font settings 258

Finishing tab 232

Flip Pages Up 236

Font Substitution Table 258

Form to Tray Assignment 257

Graphic setting 203

Halftone settings 251

Help system 199

HP Digital Imaging Options

HP Driver Preconfiguration 36

Image Color Management (ICM)

Installable Options settings

262

Job-storage settings 240

operating systems supported

Pages per Sheet 237

Paper Options 212

paper size commands 341

Paper/Output settings 202

Paper/Quality tab 207

PCL 6 color raster compression

PostScript Passthrough 264

PostScript Options 204

Print Task Quick Sets 208

Print Task Quick Sets support

Printing Preferences tabs 197

Printer Features 205

Properties tabs 198

Resizing Options settings 226

Scale to Fit 226

TrueType font settings 203

Watermarks settings 228

remote firmware update 353

uninstallation

HP Easy Printer Care 338

Macintosh printing system

327

units of measurement 130

UNIX operating systems

direct printing 361

driver availability 9

print-ready printing 361

Web site for 8

Unprintable Area, PS Emulation

Driver 169

Unsupported Operating System

dialog box, Windows 277

Update Now feature 32, 33, 164

Update screen, HP Easy Printer

Care 57

updating firmware remotely. See remote firmware update

ENWW Index 389

usage page 60

Usage Report, HP Easy Printer

Care 56

USB direct-connect installation

276

Use Different Paper, PCL traditional

drivers 132

Use Different Paper/Covers,

unidrivers 217

User Guide 19

User Name 143, 245

Wait Timeout settings 191, 261

wake time, setting 4

Watermarks settings

drivers supported 372

PCL traditional drivers 119

PS Emulation Driver 184, 185

unidrivers 228

Web Jetadmin. See HP Web

Jetadmin

Web sites

Adobe 166

downloading software 9

firmware download 344

HP Embedded Web Server links

61, 65

HP Embedded Web Server user

guide 59

Linux product support 7

support links 26

UNIX model scripts 9

UNIX support 8

Welcome dialog box,

Customization Wizard 300

Welcome dialog box, Windows

Full Installation 277

What's this? Help

PS Emulation Driver 166

Add Printer installation 297

Windows operating systems

availability of software

components 10

CD-ROM, print system 24

default printer, setting 312

dialog boxes 276

direct printing, FTP 357

direct printing, local port 359

direct printing, networks 361

directory structure, software CD-

ROM 11

driver versions 28

Enterprise AutoConfiguration

support 32

fonts supported 268

HP Driver Preconfiguration

Installer Customization Wizard

298

installers 10

installing printing software

274

LPR commands 361

Point and Print installation